Get CONTROLS Guide for BMW XM SUV First Generation (2023-2025)

Dashboard

CONTROLS

Dashboard

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Vehicle features and options

Additional information:

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1

Safety switch for the windows and

roller sunblinds 99

5

Seating comfort features

Front passenger seat functionality

102

2

Power windows 96

Memory function 110

3

4

Exterior mirror adjustment button 107

Central locking system 91

Unlocking

Massage function 100

6

7

Opening and closing cargo area

85

Locking

Turn signal lever

34

Dashboard

CONTROLS

Turn signal 160

Selecting menu contents in instru-

ment cluster 138

Changing the station/track, see

Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 6

High-beam headlights, head-

light flasher 160

Telephone, see Owner's Manual

for Navigation, Entertainment and

Communication 6

Automatic High Beam Assistant

161

Trip data 154

Knurled wheel for selecting con-

figuration menus for instrument

cluster and Head-up display 138

8

9

Shift paddles

M1 210

Using infotainment selection lists

in the instrument cluster 149

13

M2 210

10 Steering wheel buttons, left

Turn speed control systems on/off

14 Wiper lever

Wipers 168

224

Select speed control system 224

Rain sensor 169

Store speed 224

Cleaning the windshield 170

Resume speed control systems

with the stored setting.

Rear wiper in Canadian models

170

Interrupt speed control systems.

Rear wiper 170

Adjusting the speed 224

Clean the rear window 170

11 Instrument cluster 138

12 Steering wheel buttons, right

Displaying menu bar in instru-

15

16

Horn, entire surface

ment cluster 138

Adjusting the steering wheel 110

Volume, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and

Communication 6

17 Fold-out compartment 300

18 Lights

Voice activation system 57

35

Dashboard

CONTROLS

Exterior lighting menu 51

19

Unlocking the hood 369

Driving lights automatic 163

Low-beam headlights 163

Adaptive lighting functions 165

Exterior lighting off 163

20

Tank ventilation system 340

In the vicinity of the center console

1

Control display 52

Ventilation 288

Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-

cation 6

2

3

Hazard warning system 385

Adjusting the volume

Station/title forward

Station/title back

Climate control 278

Defrost function 285

Rear window defroster 286

36

Dashboard

CONTROLS

4

5

6

Button for glove compartment 299

Controller with buttons 54

Hill Descent Control 219

M Hybrid 135

Sound control 136

7

Parking brake 131

9

Turning drive-ready state on/off

119

Automatic Hold 133

10

Parking assistance systems 251

Panorama view 260

8

M Setup 210

M MODE 212

Dynamic Stability Control 215

11 Selector lever 124

In the vicinity of the headliner

1

Emergency Call, SOS 388

2

Indicator light, front passenger

airbag 174

37

Dashboard

CONTROLS

3

Reading lights 167

4

Interior lights 166

38

Sensors of the vehicle

CONTROLS

Sensors of the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Cameras

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

Front camera

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Overview

Depending on the equipment, the following

cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-

cle:

The front camera is located in the radiator

grille.

▷

Front camera.

Camera behind the windshield

Camera behind the windshield.

Top view cameras.

Rearview camera.

Front radar sensor.

Radar sensors, side, front.

Radar sensors, side, rear.

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors, side.

The camera behind the windshield is located

near the interior mirror.

39

Sensors of the vehicle

CONTROLS

▷

When the camera field of view is covered,

for instance by a fogged up windshield or

labels.

Top view cameras

▷

If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.

With exterior mirrors folded in.

With open doors or open cargo area.

When driving toward bright lights or strong

reflections, e.g., setting sun.

▷

When it is dark outside.

The camera has overheated due to exces-

sive temperatures and temporarily turned

off.

One exterior mirror camera is located at the

bottom of each exterior mirror housing.

▷

During calibration of the camera immedi-

ately after vehicle delivery.

Rearview camera

If applicable, a Check Control message will be

displayed when the system limits are reached.

Radar sensors

Safety information

Warning

The rearview camera is located above the li-

cense-plate carrier.

The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the

driver assistance systems can be impaired by

external influences, e.g., interference. There

is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-

age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation

closely, be ready to take over steering and

braking at any time, and actively intervene

where appropriate.

Functional requirement of the

cameras

The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.

Additional information:

▷

Washing the vehicle, refer to page 394.

Vehicle care, refer to page 396.

System limits of the cameras

The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,

show something that is incorrect, in the follow-

ing situations:

▷

In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.

On steep hills, in steep depressions or in

tight curves.

40

Sensors of the vehicle

CONTROLS

Front radar sensor

Functional requirement of the radar

sensors

The areas of the radar sensors are clean and

clear.

Additional information:

▷

Washing the vehicle, refer to page 394.

Vehicle care, refer to page 396.

System limits of the radar sensors

The function of the radar sensors may be re-

stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-

lowing situations:

The front radar sensor is located in the front

bumper.

▷

In case of dirty sensors.

Radar sensors, side, front

In case of iced-up sensors.

If sensors are covered such as by labels,

films or a license-plate carrier.

▷

If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-

stance due to parking damage.

If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-

ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.

When the field of view of the sensors is cov-

ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow

hills, vehicles or trailers.

The radar sensors are located on the side of

the front bumper.

▷

After improper paint work on the vehicle in

the area of the sensors.

On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the

road.

Radar sensors, side, rear

If applicable, a Check Control message will be

displayed when the system limits are reached.

The radar sensors are located on the side of

the rear bumper.

41

Sensors of the vehicle

CONTROLS

Functional requirement of the

ultrasonic sensors

Ultrasonic sensors

The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean

and clear.

Ultrasonic sensors, front

Additional information:

▷

Washing the vehicle, refer to page 394.

Vehicle care, refer to page 396.

System limits of the ultrasonic

sensors

The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-

urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in

the following situations:

The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-

tance systems are located in the front bumper.

▷

If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by

stickers.

Ultrasonic sensors, rear

If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-

stance due to parking damage.

After improper paint work on the vehicle in

the area of the sensors.

▷

For small children and animals.

For persons with certain clothing, for in-

stance jacket.

▷

With obstacles and persons at the edge of

the lane.

In case of external interference with the

ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-

hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic

sources.

The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-

tance systems are located in the rear bumper.

Ultrasonic sensors, side

▷

Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high

moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-

treme heat, or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer hitches of other

vehicles.

▷

With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

With moving objects.

With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges.

▷

With objects with corners, edges, and

smooth surfaces.

The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-

tance systems are located on the sides of the

front and rear bumpers.

42

Sensors of the vehicle

CONTROLS

▷

In the case of objects with fine surfaces or

structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.

▷

For objects with porous surfaces.

With small and low objects, for instance

boxes.

▷

Low objects already displayed, for instance

curbs, can be outside of the detection

ranges of the sensors.

With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in

foam material.

▷

With plants and bushes.

In automatic car washes.

In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed

bumps.

▷

If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.

Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of

the vehicle is not taken into account by the

ultrasonic sensors.

▷

When the trailer hitch cover is not on

straight.

If applicable, a Check Control message will be

displayed when the system limits are reached.

43

Operating state of the vehicle

CONTROLS

Operating state of the vehicle

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured

against rolling away, follow the following:

Vehicle features and options

▷

Set the parking brake.

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Automatic transmission: Make sure that

selector lever position P is engaged.

▷

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

turn the front wheels in the direction of

the curb.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

also secure the vehicle, for instance with

a wheel chock.

General information

Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in

one of the three states:

Warning

▷

Idle state.

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger

themselves and traffic, for example, due to

the following actions:

Standby state.

Drive-ready state.

▷

Establishing standby.

Idle state

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or win-

dows.

Principle

When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched

off.

▷

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-

mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-

hicle key with you when exiting and lock the

vehicle.

General information

The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening

from the outside and after exiting and locking.

Safety information

Establishing the sleep mode

automatically

The sleep mode is established automatically

such as in the following situations:

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and

possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,

injury, and property damage. Before leaving

the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling

away.

44

Operating state of the vehicle

CONTROLS

▷

After several minutes, if no operation takes

place on the vehicle.

General information

The vehicle is in standby state after the front

doors are opened from the outside.

If the charge state of the vehicle battery is

low.

Depending on the configuration via iDrive:

one or both front doors will be opened after

driving when exiting the vehicle.

Manually setting to standby

General information

In some situations, the idle state is not set au-

tomatically, for instance during a phone call or

when the low-beam headlights are switched

on.

Standby can be switched back on after the ve-

hicle is automatically set to idle state.

Via the volume button

Press the volume button on the

radio. The control display and

the instrument cluster illuminate.

Establishing idle state when

opening the front doors

After a trip, the sleep mode can be established

by opening the front doors. For this purpose,

all passengers must exit the vehicle.

Using the Start/Stop button

1.

Apps menu

Press the Start/Stop button.

2. "Vehicle"

The control display and the instrument

cluster illuminate.

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

5. "Turn off after opening door"

Display in the instrument cluster

Establishing the sleep mode

manually

To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-

pletion of trip:

OFF is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster. Drive-ready state

is turned off and standby state

turned on.

Press and hold the volume but-

ton on the radio until all displays

go out.

Drive-ready state

Principle

The following are the different drive-ready

state variants:

Standby state

▷

Electric drive-ready state.

Principle

The vehicle is powered by the electric mo-

tor.

When standby state is switched on, most func-

tions can be used while the vehicle is station-

ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.

▷

Starting of combustion engine.

The vehicle is powered by the combustion

engine.

45

Operating state of the vehicle

CONTROLS

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

DANGER

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger

themselves and traffic, for example, due to

the following actions:

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is

insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-

trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain

pollutants which are colorless and odorless.

In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also

accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a

danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and

ensure sufficient ventilation.

▷

Establishing standby.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or win-

dows.

▷

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-

mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-

hicle key with you when exiting and lock the

vehicle.

Warning

When driving in electric mode, pedestrians

and other road users might pay less attention

to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Adjust driving style to traffic

conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate

Turning on the drive-ready state

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Warning

Most of the indicator lights and warning

lights on the instrument cluster illuminate

for different lengths of time depending on

the duration of the system check.

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and

possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,

injury, and property damage. Before leaving

the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling

away.

If the corresponding requirements are met,

electric drive-ready state can be used or the

combustion engine can be started.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured

against rolling away, follow the following:

▷

Set the parking brake.

Electric drive-ready state

Automatic transmission: Make sure that

selector lever position P is engaged.

General information

The vehicle is ready for driving without starting

the combustion engine.

▷

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

turn the front wheels in the direction of

the curb.

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

also secure the vehicle, for instance with

a wheel chock.

Functional requirements

Electric drive-ready state can be used if the

corresponding requirements for electric drive

are met.

Additional information:

46

Operating state of the vehicle

CONTROLS

BMW eDRIVE, refer to page 16.

Display in the instrument cluster

When the drive-ready state

is switched on, READY is dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

Combustion engine start

The combustion engine is started under the

following conditions when the drive-ready

state is switched on:

▷

The temperature of the hybrid system is

too high or too low.

The high-voltage battery has insufficient

charge.

The vehicle was parked in SPORT driving

mode shortly beforehand.

Turning off drive-ready state

1. While the vehicle is stationary, engage se-

lector lever position P and apply the parking

brake.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

After parking the vehicle, the hybrid system

may generate audible operating noises, e.g.,

when cooling the high-voltage battery.

47

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

Safety information

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems

and communication devices while driving can

distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible

to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. Only

use the systems or devices when the traffic

situation allows. As warranted, stop and use

the systems and devices while the vehicle is

stationary.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Display and operating

concept

Principle

Main menu

BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-

ating concept and includes a wide range of

functions.

General information

The main menu is divided into different areas.

General information

Overview

Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions

can be operated as follows:

▷

Via the control display.

Via the Controller.

Via the touchpad.

Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.

Via the gesture control.

Via the operating elements on the steering

wheel.

1

Menu bar

Additional information:

2

3

4

Widgets

Instrument cluster, refer to page 138.

Status information

Climate bar, A/C 278

48

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Android Auto© menu

Menu bar

Depending on the national-market version

with a connected function: access to Android

Auto. Android Auto enables the secure use

of certain functions of a compatible Android

smartphone via iDrive.

Apps menu

Access to apps and vehicle functions. A

filter can be selected. If necessary, change the

filter to see the apps you want.

▷

"All apps": All apps and functions are dis-

played.

Widgets

Widgets show real-time information and dy-

namic content such as current media or paired

smartphones. The widgets also serve as but-

tons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.

"Infotainment": Only infotainment apps are

displayed.

"Vehicle": Only vehicle adjustment func-

tions are displayed.

"Recently used": The most recently used

apps are displayed.

Status information

General information

Media menu

The status field can be found in the upper area

of the control display. Status information is dis-

played in the form of icons. Depending on the

equipment and national-market version, differ-

ent icons are available.

Access to functions of the entertainment

system, e.g., radio stations or connection with

external devices.

Communication menu

Access to the telephone and message

function as well as the connection and man-

agement of mobile devices such as smart-

phones.

Telephone status information

Icon

Meaning

Active call.

Navigation menu

Signal strength.

SIM card missing.

Access to the navigation system, destina-

tion input and traffic bulletins. Configurable

map views and other functions such as points

of interest.

Entertainment status information

Icon Meaning

USB audio.

Climate menu

The Climate menu provides access to all

climate control functions.

Bluetooth audio.

Smartphone audio.

Connected Music with Spotify.

Time shift.

Apple CarPlay© menu

Depending on the national-market version

with a connected function: access to Apple

CarPlay. Apple CarPlay enables the secure

use of certain functions of a compatible Apple

iPhone via iDrive.

Wi-Fi.

Apple CarPlay.

49

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Input and display

Icon Meaning

Android Auto.

Letters and numbers

Letters and numbers can be entered using the

controller, touchpad, control display, or voice

control, depending on vehicle equipment.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Status information messages

Icon

Function

Icon Meaning

Change between capital and

lower-case letters.

Number of notifications.

Check Control message.

Suppress private information.

Do not disturb.

Enter a blank space.

Switching between languages.

Use voice control.

Message.

Confirm entry.

Shift the input area to the left

or right.

Additional information:

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-

ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.

Entry comparison

Other status information

When entering data from a database such as

contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed

down for each character entered, with charac-

ters being added as necessary.

Icon Meaning

Sound output active.

Activating/deactivating the functions

Some menu items are preceded by an icon.

Selecting the menu item enables or disables

the function.

Sound output deactivated.

Activation word active.

BMW ID or driver profile.

Destination guidance active.

Go to quick access.

Icon

Meaning

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Wireless charging active.

Park Distance Control: sound active.

Enabling/disabling audible feedback

For some functions, audio confirmation is

given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating

the control display.

Park Distance Control: sound deacti-

vated.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

50

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

4. "Sound"

Shortcuts can only be created with an active

BMW ID or a driver profile.

5. Select the desired setting.

Executing a function

1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control

display.

Quick access

The quick link provides access to shortcuts,

certain settings, and app recommendations.

2. Tap the desired shortcut.

Input

Operation

The function will work immediately. This

means for instance that the connection is es-

tablished when a phone number is selected.

Show

Swipe from top to bottom on the

quick link. control display.

Slide the controller up.

Tap the icon on the status

bar.

Swipe from the bottom up on the

quick link. control display.

Slide the controller down.

Deleting shortcuts

1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control

display.

Hide

2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.

3. "Delete shortcut"

Activating/deactivating pop-ups

For some functions, pop-ups are displayed

automatically on the control display. Some of

these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.

Direct access

General information

The vehicle has buttons that can be used to

access menus for the respective function di-

rectly on the control display. Then continue the

operation via iDrive.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Pop-ups"

Overview

5. Select the desired setting.

Button Function

Shortcuts

Go to the Exterior Lighting menu be-

tween the steering wheel and driv-

er’s door.

General information

The iDrive functions can be stored on the

shortcuts and called up directly, for instance

radio stations, navigation destinations, phone

numbers and menu entries.

BMW Curved Display

Principle

Storing a function

The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen

display in the instrument panel that is curved

towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display

comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-

er's side and the control display.

1. Select the desired function.

2. Press and hold the desired function.

3. "Add to shortcuts"

51

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

General information

Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW

Curved Display in the Care chapter.

Warning

Objects in the area in front of a display can

slip and damage the display. There is a risk

of injury and risk of property damage. Do not

place objects in the area in front of a display.

Additional information:

Caring for special components, refer to

page 397.

Overview

1

Instrument cluster 138

Control display 52

Control display.

2

Switching the control display on/off

automatically

The control display is turned on automatically

when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the

control display is needed for operation.

Control display

Principle

In certain situations, the control display is

switched off automatically, for instance if no

operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-

eral minutes.

The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-

trol display.

Safety information

Switching the control display on/off

manually

1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control

display.

Warning

When driving, loose items or devices con-

nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile

phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,

e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-

ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There

is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.

Secure loose objects or devices that are con-

nected to the vehicle via a cable.

2. "Screen off"

Tap the control display to turn it on again.

Setting the brightness

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Displays"

52

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

4. "Control display"

Buttons on the Controller

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Make the desired setting.

Button Function

Call up the main menu.

Depending on the light conditions, the bright-

ness control may not be clearly visible.

Call up the Media/Radio menu.

System limits

In the case of very high temperatures on the

control display, for instance due to intense so-

lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced

down to complete deactivation. Once the

temperature is reduced, for instance through

shade or air conditioning system, the normal

functions are restored.

Go to Phone menu.

Call up the navigation map.

Call up the destination input menu

for navigation.

Controller

Go to previous menu.

Principle

The Controller can be used to select menu

items and enter the settings. The buttons can

be used to open the menus directly.

Call up the Options menu.

Overview

Operation

▷

Rotate the Controller to switch between

menu options, for example.

Controller

▷

Press the Controller to select a menu

option, for example.

53

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

3. Tilt the Controller to the right.

4. Select the desired main display.

Selecting a widget

1. Use the Controller to select widgets.

2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-

sired widget is selected.

3. Press the Controller.

▷

Slide the Controller in four directions to

switch between menus, for example.

Switching between menus

A new display opens after a menu item is se-

lected.

▷

Slide the Controller to the left.

The current menu closes and the previous

menu is displayed.

▷

Press the button.

The current menu closes and the previous

menu is displayed.

Operating via the Controller

Calling up the context menu

Depending on the menu item, a context menu

with additional options can be displayed.

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

1. Select the desired menu item using the

Controller.

2. Press and hold the Controller.

The main menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for in-

stance:

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.

▷

"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-

er's Manual.

▷

"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as

shortcut.

2. Press the Controller.

Adjusting the main display

The main display can be adjusted in the main

menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Letters and numbers can only be entered

when stationary.

1.

Press the button.

2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the

main display.

54

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

3. "System settings"

4. "Touchpad"

Input

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-

bers.

5. Select the desired setting.

2.

: confirm entry.

Entering letters and numbers

Additional information:

▷

Enter characters as they are displayed on

the control display.

Setting the system language, refer to

page 60.

▷

Always enter associated characters such as

accents or periods so that the letter can be

clearly recognized.

Deleting an entry

Icon Function

▷

The set language determines what input

is possible. Where necessary, enter special

characters via the Controller.

Press Controller: delete a letter or num-

ber.

Additional information:

Hold the Controller down: delete all let-

ters or numbers.

Setting the system language, refer to

page 60.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-

tries, the letters for which an entry exists can

be displayed in a text box.

Entering special characters

Function

Operation

Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right

quickly.

ter.

touchpad.

Enter a blank

space.

Swipe to the right in the

center of the touchpad.

2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.

The first entry of the selected letter is dis-

played in the list.

Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the

upper area of the touch-

pad.

Operation via touchpad

Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the

score.

lower area of the touch-

pad.

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive

functions can be operated with the controller

touchpad.

Using the map

The map in the navigation system can be

moved via the touchpad.

The touchpad is located on the Controller.

Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not

use any objects.

Tap the map on the control display and then

continue operation using the touchpad.

Selecting functions

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

55

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

The widget is deleted.

Function

Operation

▷

Press and hold the widget and drag to

the left or right.

Move map.

Swipe in the appropriate di-

rection.

The widget is moved to the desired po-

sition.

Display menu. Tap once.

Sorting apps

Using alphabetical lists

To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-

sired icon and move it to the desired location.

Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries

permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-

try exists.

Switching between menus

Enter the first letter on the touchpad.

A new display opens after a menu item is se-

lected.

The first entry of the entered letter is displayed

in the list.

Select the arrow symbol.

The current menu closes and the previous

menu is displayed.

Operation via control display

General information

Calling up the context menu

Depending on the equipment version, the con-

trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.

Depending on the menu item, a context menu

with additional options can be displayed.

You can tap on menu items and widgets.

Touch the control display with your fingers. Do

not use any objects.

Press and hold the desired menu item.

The menu consists of various areas, for in-

stance:

▷

"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-

er's Manual.

Opening the main menu

Tap on the icon.

▷

"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as

shortcut.

The main menu is displayed.

Adjusting widgets

The widgets can be adjusted in the main

menu. The adjustments can only be performed

when the vehicle is stationary.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. If necessary, tap the

display.

icon or control

1. If necessary,

tap the icon.

2. Enter desired letters and numbers.

2. Press and hold the widget.

3. Make the desired adjustment:

▷

Tap on the icon.

A new widget can be selected.

Tap on the icon.

▷

56

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Deleting an entry

General information

▷

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-

able depending on national-market version.

Icon Function

Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.

▷

The system includes special microphones

on the driver side and the front passenger

side.

Press and hold the icon: delete all let-

ters or numbers.

▷

Say the commands and numbers fluently

as well as with normal volume, emphasis,

and speed.

Using the map

The navigation map can be moved on the con-

trol display.

›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-

ken.

Function

Operation

Functional requirements

Move map.

Swipe in the appropriate

direction.

▷

A language that is supported by the Per-

sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.

Enlarge/shrink

map.

Drag in or out with the fin-

gers.

Setting the system language, refer to

page 60.

Display menu.

Tap once.

▷

Always say commands in the configured

system language.

For the full range of functions, you must acti-

vate, configure, or purchase the following func-

tions:

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-

tries, the letters for which an entry exists can

be displayed in a text box.

▷

Online speech processing, refer to

page 60.

1. Tap the letter in front of the list.

A letter box is displayed.

▷

For all settings under

Data protection, refer to page 71.

Activation word, refer to page 58.

BMW ID or a driver profile.

2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.

▷

The first entry of the selected letter is dis-

played in the list.

Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the

ConnectedDrive Store.

BMW Intelligent Personal

Assistant

▷

Suggestions, refer to page 60.

Activating the voice control system

Principle

General information

There are various methods for activating the

voice control feature:

The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a

personal assistant that enables natural voice

operation of various vehicle functions. The

Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate

the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions

and automating habits.

▷

Press the button on the steering

wheel briefly.

57

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

The microphone on the driver's side is ac-

tive.

The activation word should consist of multiple

syllables to ensure good recognition.

▷

Speaking the activation word.

›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary

for the activation word and does not need to

be spoken.

The microphones on the driver's or front

passenger's side are active with the follow-

ing voice control, depending on where the

activation word was spoken.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Then say the command. The activation word

and the command can be spoken without

pause in one sentence.

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Wake word"

Microphone button on steering wheel

7. "Personal wake word"

8. "Set"

1.

Press button briefly.

2. Say the command.

Activation word

General information

9. "Start recording"

Activation word from third-party providers

Depending on national-market version, some

third-party providers offer digital voice assis-

tants, e.g., Amazon Alexa.

Saying the activation word will start the Per-

sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-

tens.

To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-

nected via Apple CarPlay.

Supported voice assistants can be used with a

connected smartphone in the vehicle.

Preset activation word

›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can

be activated and deactivated.

The activation word from connected third-

party providers can be used in addition to your

preset or personal activation word from BMW.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

1.

Apps menu

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Wake word"

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

5. "Additional speech assistants"

6. Select the desired setting.

7. ""Hello BMW""

Personal activation word

Canceling voice control

In addition to the preset activation word, a

personal activation word can be set up with

an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-

sonal activation word can also be changed or

deleted.

▷

Press the button on the steering

wheel again.

›Cancel‹

58

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

▷

Slide the Controller to the right or left.

Press the Controller.

Additional example commands can be dis-

played on the control display.

1.

Apps menu

Possible commands

2. "All apps"

3. "Personal Assistant"

4. "Help"

General information

Commands can be used to give instructions

or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant

providing assistance.

5. "Example commands"

Sample commands for the current context are

displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-

sistant widget.

For example, you can call contacts, navigate

to an address, apply settings, or ask questions

about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions

can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the

Automatic Parking Assistant.

Additional information:

Adjust widgets, refer to page 56.

Most content on the control display can be

spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list

entries.

Menu items

The Personal Assistant can bring up menu

items directly. Say the menu items as they are

displayed on the control display. You do not

have to follow the order of the menu items

when speaking them out loud.

Help for voice control

▷

›Voice commands‹: have possible example

commands suggested.

1. Activate the voice control system.

2. ›Media‹

▷

›General information on voice control‹: have

information on the operating principle of the

voice control announced.

3. ›Presets‹

The stored stations are displayed on the

control display.

▷

›Help‹: have tips and example commands

for voice control announced.

Additional example commands for the cur-

rent context are displayed in the widget of

the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.

Owner's Manual via voice operation

You can ask simple questions about vehicle

functions and the operation of the vehicle.

Sample commands

The voice activation system and the feed-

back it provides do not replace the printed

or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function

is available depending on the national-market

version. The speech recognition and quality of

the feedback may vary.

▷

›Call John Smith‹

›Drive me to JFK airport‹

›Play a classical music station‹

›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹

›Activate the climate control‹

›Increase the ACC distance‹

›Sport mode‹

Example command: ›How can the passenger

airbag be deactivated?‹

The Personal Assistant returns feedback.

When stationary, the section of the integrated

Owner's Manual is displayed on the control

display.

59

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Suggestions

Settings

General information

Setting the system language

The Personal Assistant provides helpful, indi-

vidual suggestions.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Language"

Activating/deactivating suggestions

1.

Apps menu

5. Select the desired setting.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

Setting the response length

You can set the Personal Assistant to use

standard dialog or a short version. In case of

the short version, the announcements by the

Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-

breviated version.

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Receive suggestions"

Adapting suggestions

Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by

category or to output a signal tone.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

1.

Apps menu

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Response length"

7. Select the desired setting.

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. Select the desired setting.

Speaking during voice output

Online speech processing

It is possible to answer during inquiries of the

Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-

abled if requests are often canceled uninten-

tionally, for instance due to background noise

or conversations in the vehicle.

Online speech processing improves the quality

of the speech recognition and search results

for points of interest. To use the functions,

data is transmitted to a service provider via an

encrypted connection and stored locally there.

An active ConnectedDrive contract is required

for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is

available depending on the national-market

version. Online speech processing is not avail-

able in all languages.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Speaking during voice output"

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

60

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Online speech processing"

The device must be connected via Apple Car-

Play or Android Auto.

Configuring the visualization

How the Personal Assistant is visualized can

be set.

1. Press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.

The voice activation of the smartphone is

activated.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

If activation is successful, a confirmation

appears on the control display.

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

2. Press and hold the

button on the

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Visualization"

steering wheel to cancel voice control of the

smartphone.

Voice control from third-party

providers

Amazon Alexa Car Integration

Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party

voice control can be enabled by pressing and

holding the microphone button on the steering

wheel.

Principle

Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-

pending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version. Alexa is a digital assistant

from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-

tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For

safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-

tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-

cle.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

5. "Long press"

Functional requirements

6. Select the desired setting.

▷

A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button during the voice guid-

ance until the desired volume is set.

▷

An active Amazon account must exist.

Activating Amazon Alexa Car

Integration

Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in

the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.

The volume remains constant even if the vol-

ume of other audio sources is changed.

Using the voice activation of the

smartphone

Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa

app to set it up in the vehicle.

Depending on the device, a smartphone con-

nected to the vehicle can be used via voice

control.

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "Amazon Alexa"

4. Select the desired setting.

61

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the

vehicle as follows:

BMW Gesture Control

Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-

sired command.

Principle

Several iDrive functions can be operated by

hand motion using BMW Gesture Control.

Information about the active function is dis-

played on the control display. If the function

is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as

necessary.

Overview

Automating routines

General information

The Personal Assistant can automate routines,

for instance the automatic opening of windows

in the same place. Rules are created for this

purpose, which can be activated and deacti-

vated at any time.

The camera in the headliner detects gestures

that are carried out in the area of the center

console at the height of the control display.

Activating/deactivating routines

1.

Apps menu

The camera of the gesture control uses an in-

visible Class 1 laser.

2. "All apps"

3. "Automate habits"

4. Select the desired setting.

Activate/deactivate gesture control

1.

Apps menu

System limits

2. "Vehicle"

▷

The Personal Assistant provides informa-

tion about vehicle functions that may not be

installed in the vehicle.

3. "System settings"

4. "Gesture control"

5. "Gesture control"

This also applies to safety functions and

systems.

Settings

▷

Certain noises can be detected and may

lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-

dows closed.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Noises from the front passenger or occu-

pants can impair the system. Avoid making

other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

3. "System settings"

4. "Gesture control"

5. Select the desired setting.

▷

Major language dialects can cause prob-

lems with the speech recognition feature.

A poor data connection affects the re-

sponse time of the Personal Assistant and

search function.

62

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

▷

Execute gestures clearly.

Carrying out gestures

The gestures can also be executed from

the front-passenger side.

▷

Perform gestures underneath the interior

mirror and next to the steering wheel.

Possible gestures

Gesture

Operation

Function

Move extended index finger forward and Accept call.

backward in the direction of the control

Select a highlighted entry in a

list during voice control.

Confirm pop-up.

display.

Swipe the hand in front of the control

display in the direction of the passenger

seat.

Reject call.

Close pop-up.

End voice control.

Move extended index finger slowly in a

clockwise circular movement.

Increase the volume.

Gesture is detected after one circular

movement.

Move the extended index finger counter- Reduce the volume.

clockwise in a circular movement.

Gesture is detected after one circular

movement.

Depending on the

equipment:

Bring thumb and index finger together

and move the hand to the right or left.

Turn vehicle in the Live Vehi-

cle view.

3D view: rotate camera view.

This gesture can only be exe-

cuted while the vehicle is sta-

tionary.

Move fist with thumb extended to the left Reverse Skip function.

back and forth.

The previous title is played.

63

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Gesture

Operation

Function

Move fist with thumb extended to the

right back and forth.

Forward Skip function.

The next title is played.

With the index and middle fingers ex-

tended, point into the direction of the

control display.

Perform individually assigna-

ble gesture.

Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and

stretch five fingers out again.

Perform individually assigna-

ble gesture.

Select function

Assigning gesture individually

Some defined functions can be selected di-

rectly in the menu for gesture control.

General information

Two gestures can be assigned individually and

can be configured as shortcut for certain func-

tions such as:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Gesture control"

▷

Destination guidance to home address.

Mute/Playback

5. "Point two fingers at display" or "Show five-

o-five fingers"

Control display on/off

Gesture shortcuts can only be created with an

active BMW ID or a driver profile.

6. Select the desired setting.

System limits

Configure gesture shortcut

Gesture recognition by the camera in the

headliner can be disturbed by the following cir-

cumstances:

The desired function can be selected directly in

every menu and configured as shortcut.

1. Press and hold the desired menu item.

2. "Add to gesture shortcuts"

▷

The camera lens is covered.

Objects are located on the interior mirror.

3. Select the desired gesture.

The camera lens is dirty, clean camera

lens.

Sensors and camera lenses, refer to

page 396.

▷

The gesture is executed outside of the de-

tection range.

64

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

▷

Wearing of gloves or jewelry.

Smoking in the car's interior.

▷

Driver’s Guide app.

Driver’s Guide Web.

Safety information

Connecting mobile devices

to the vehicle

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems

and communication devices while driving can

distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible

to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. Only

use the systems or devices when the traffic

situation allows. As warranted, stop and use

the systems and devices while the vehicle is

stationary.

Principle

Various connection modes are available for us-

ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-

tion mode to select depends on the mobile de-

vice and desired function.

General information

Detailed information on the functions and con-

nection modes is provided in the following me-

dia from the Owner's Manual under the speci-

fied keyword:

Overview

The following overview shows possible func-

tions and suitable connection modes for them.

The range of functions depends on the vehicle

equipment and the mobile device.

▷

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,

communication and entertainment.

The following information sources can also be

used:

Function

Connection mode

Icon on the con-

trol display

Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.

tem.

Keyword: Bluetooth connection.

Using phone functions via iDrive.

Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.

Playing music from a mobile device.

Keyword: audio.

Bluetooth audio.

Keyword: Bluetooth connection.

Calling without a mobile phone.

Personal eSIM.

Keyword: calling with the Personal

eSIM.

Keyword: Personal eSIM.

Data exchange between mobile de-

vice and vehicle.

Wi-Fi.

Keyword: vehicle WLAN.

65

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Function

Connection mode

Icon on the con-

trol display

Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.

hotspot.

Keyword: personal hotspot.

Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and

via voice control.

Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.

Keyword: Bluetooth connection and

Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.

Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.

voice control.

Keyword: Bluetooth connection and

Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.

Playing music from a USB device.

Keyword: audio.

USB.

Keyword: USB connection.

Additional information:

USB port, refer to page 294.

66

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

CONTROLS

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-

mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-

hicle key with you when exiting and lock the

vehicle.

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional information:

Functional requirements

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

▷

Active ConnectedDrive contract.

▷

The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has

been activated.

BMW Remote Software

Upgrade

▷

Cellular network reception.

Consent to transmit the corresponding data

was given in the Data Protection menu.

Principle

Additional information:

Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-

date the entire software of the vehicle. This

makes new functions, functional enhance-

ments or quality improvements available.

Data protection, refer to page 71.

Search for an upgrade

Functional requirement

Standby must be turned on to search for a

Remote Software Upgrade.

General information

BMW recommends performing the Remote

Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes

available.

Automatic search

The vehicle regularly searches for updates in

the background.

Safety information

Warning

Manual search

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger

themselves and traffic, for example, due to

the following actions:

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Remote Software Upgrade"

5. "Search for upgrades"

▷

Establishing standby.

Releasing the parking brake.

6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play.

Opening and closing the doors or win-

dows.

▷

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

67

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

CONTROLS

Download of an upgrade

Information about the version

Automatic download

General information

If available, the data for a Remote Software

Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the

vehicle. No download consent is required.

The information about the version contains a

description of the updates included in the Re-

mote Software Upgrade. During the download

and after the installation has been successfully

completed, the information about the version

can be displayed on the control display.

Via My BMW App

If an upgrade is available, information on the

new software version is displayed in the My

BMW App.

This information is also available in the Con-

nectedDrive customer portal.

The data for the upgrade can then be down-

loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an

existing WLAN connection.

Displaying information

Display in the vehicle:

Data can then be sent from the mobile device

to the vehicle.

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

This transmission method accelerates the

download of the data, for instance in areas

with limited mobile network availability.

3. "System settings"

4. "Remote Software Upgrade"

5.

▷

Display currently installed version:

"Installed version:"

You do not need to be present in the vehicle to

download the data to a mobile device.

▷

Display new available version:

"Info on version"

1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW

App on your smartphone.

2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.

6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play.

3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via

Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.

Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:

Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-

bile device to the vehicle both while driving

and when stopped. Depending on the size

of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive

your vehicle to complete the data transfer.

Installing the upgrade

General information

4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play.

▷

Installation of the Remote Software Up-

grade may result in the deletion of software

changes, e.g., performance increases not

made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.

Additional information:

Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,

see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-

ment, Communication.

▷

Modifications to the electrical system of the

vehicle, for instance to control units, that

have not been made by the vehicle manu-

facturer can lead to an interruption of the

installation.

▷

The installation does not occur until the

consent was given.

68

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

CONTROLS

▷

The installation may take around 20 to

30 minutes.

vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-

stallation is terminated.

▷

The installation cannot be terminated.

▷

Close the windows.

Close the cargo area.

The vehicle cannot be used during the in-

stallation.

Remove energy consuming devices such as

a mobile phone.

▷

The vehicle can be exited during the instal-

lation.

▷

Disconnect any trailer or load carrier.

Charging the vehicle is interrupted due to

the installation.

The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-

cle for the consent for installation.

Following the successful installation, charg-

ing the vehicle may not continue automati-

cally.

▷

Switch off the exterior lighting.

Remove the devices connected to the diag-

nostic socket.

Prerequisites for the installation

Installing immediately

The upgrade can be installed immediately if all

prerequisites have been met.

▷

Sufficiently charged battery.

▷

The outside temperature is above

14 ℉/-10 ℃.

1.

Apps menu

▷

The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-

tion.

2. "All apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Remote Software Upgrade"

5. "Start upgrade now"

▷

The hazard warning system is turned off.

The selector lever position P is engaged.

The engine is turned off and sufficiently

cooled down.

6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play.

If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-

requisites on the control display.

Installing with timer

Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites

automatically. Follow the instructions on the

control display.

When the trip is completed, a timer can be

used to install the upgrade automatically at

a configured time such as during the night. It

may also be helpful to install the upgrade at

a later time so that all functional requirements

are met, e.g., to allow the engine to cool suf-

ficiently or the vehicle battery to charge suffi-

ciently.

If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-

ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be

offered for installation.

Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,

after charging the battery for a longer period of

time.

1.

Apps menu

Preparing the vehicle

2. "All apps"

▷

Park the vehicle safely away from the public

road.

3. "System settings"

4. "Remote Software Upgrade"

5. Select the desired settings.

The installation starts automatically when:

▷

Cellular network reception must be ensured

so that a fault message can be sent to the

69

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

CONTROLS

▷

All prerequisites for the installation have

been established correctly.

Malfunction

In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-

structions on the control display or in the My

BMW App.

All prerequisites continue to be met at the

time of installation.

The timer is turned off when the drive-ready

state is turned on.

If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact

an authorized service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Installing via the My BMW App

Validity of the Owner's Manual

Once all preparations are complete and all re-

quirements are met, the upgrade installation

can also be started using the My BMW App

when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade in-

stallation can be started remotely.

Production of the vehicle

At the time of production at the plant, the

printed Owner's Manual is the most current

resource.

Follow instructions in the My BMW App.

Functional limitations

During the upgrade, the majority of functions is

temporarily unavailable, for instance:

After a software update in the vehicle

After a vehicle software update such as via Re-

mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-

er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-

est information.

▷

Hazard warning system.

Central locking system and, if necessary,

Comfort Access.

▷

Parking lights.

Horn.

Alarm system.

Emergency call.

Power windows.

Checking the fuel filler flap lock.

Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.

Lock the charging socket flap.

The driver's door can be locked and unlocked

from the outside using the integrated key.

After successful upgrade

The vehicle can be used again immediately.

Booked services such as Advanced Real Time

Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-

tomatically reactivated during the next trip.

After a longer stationary period, recharge the

vehicle battery with the charging cable as nec-

essary.

70

Personal settings

CONTROLS

Personal settings

This personal data can be permanently de-

leted using iDrive.

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

General information

Depending on the equipment, the following

data is deleted:

▷

BMW IDs or driver profiles.

Stored radio stations.

Stored shortcuts.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Navigation, for instance stored destina-

tions.

Data protection

▷

Phone book.

Data transfer

Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.

Office data, for instance voice memos.

Login accounts.

Principle

The vehicle offers different services, whose

use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-

ice provider.

Digital key.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take

up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-

moved from the My BMW App and Connected-

Drive customer portal so that remote functions

can no longer be used.

General information

The data transfer can be deactivated for some

services. When the data transfer is deacti-

vated, the respective service cannot be used.

Functional requirements

Settings

▷

Data can only be deleted while stationary.

The data transfer can be configured in different

stages or individually for separate services.

▷

The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.

Deleting data

1.

Apps menu

The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted

when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-

tings.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Data privacy"

Additional information:

5. Select the desired setting.

Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 71.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Reset vehicle data

Principle

All individual settings can be reset to the fac-

tory settings when the drive-ready state is

Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores

personal data such as stored radio stations.

71

Personal settings

CONTROLS

switched off. Data can only be deleted while

the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must

be in the vehicle.

With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver

profile can be activated as soon as you unlock

your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital

key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver

profile. After unlocking, you can change the

BMW ID or driver profile.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Reset vehicle data"

5. "Reset vehicle data"

If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when

the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the

guest profile.

If the synchronization of settings has been en-

abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal

settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.

Functional requirements

The vehicle must be stationary to create,

change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.

Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and

synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only

possible when the vehicle has cellular network

reception.

BMW ID/driver profiles

Principle

In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is

the personal login for all relevant offers for the

BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the

vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle

settings.

Welcome window

After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window

is shown on the control display. The type of

the welcome depends on the following prereq-

uisites:

In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal

vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.

▷

The vehicle does not have a stored BMW

ID or driver profile:

If a vehicle is used by several people, each per-

son can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If

a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it

are applied to the vehicle.

The welcome is neutral. An option to add a

BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.

▷

The vehicle key or the digital key has not

been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-

file:

General information

The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW

IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered

for selection. Additionally, it is possible to

add a new BMW ID or create a new driver

profile.

The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW

ID can be registered via the My BMW App, in

the ConnectedDrive Portal, or through an au-

thorized service center.

A driver profile is created in the vehicle.

▷

A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-

signed to the vehicle key or digital key:

Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW

ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the

BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-

ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is

used to log in.

The welcome is personalized, the stored

settings are activated. The BMW ID or the

driver profile can be changed.

As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on

or the control display is tapped outside of the

Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.

The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three

driver profiles.

72

Personal settings

CONTROLS

It may be necessary to log in again with the

BMW ID.

Adding the BMW ID

1.

Tap the BMW ID icon or the personal

image on the status bar.

This icon is displayed on the status bar

and indicates when it is necessary to login

again.

2. "Add BMW ID"

3. Scan the displayed QR code with your

smartphone.

1. Select the BMW ID.

2. Scan the QR code shown.

4. Observe the instructions on your smart-

phone.

Another login will be attempted. Once suc-

cessfully logged in, all functions can be used

again.

▷

If you have installed the My BMW App

on your smartphone and saved your

BMW ID, the BMW ID is automatically

transferred to the vehicle.

My BMW app

▷

If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a

new BMW ID can be registered.

If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,

the vehicle is automatically added to the My

BMW app. The My BMW App provides numer-

ous beneficial functions and settings, e.g., user

management.

5. Select the other settings you want to

change, e.g., to configure driver recognition

as desired.

Alternatively, an authorized service center can

add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,

the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the

control display in the corresponding vehicle.

To configure driver recognition, the corre-

sponding vehicle key or digital key must be

detected in the vehicle.

Driver recognition can be set or changed in

the settings at a later time.

In rare cases, the use of My BMW App func-

tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More

information is shown on the control display.

6. Change any additional settings as neces-

sary.

Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by

an authorized service center and added to the

vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed

on the control display in the corresponding ve-

hicle.

Creating a driver profile

In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not

available, driver profiles can be created.

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW

App.

2. "Add driver profile"

3. Enter the name for the driver profile.

4. Select the desired setting:

"Transfer settings"

Confirming a BMW ID

If the BMW ID was created by an authorized

service center and added to the vehicle, you

must then confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle:

If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-

tings of the guest profile will be applied.

1. Select the BMW ID.

2. Scan the QR code shown.

Primary user

The primary user is the person who first adds

their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the

vehicle to their My BMW App. Alternatively, the

3. Follow the instructions on your smart-

phone.

73

Personal settings

CONTROLS

primary user can be defined by an authorized

service center.

gers the activation of the assigned BMW ID

or the assigned driver profile.

The primary user has access to the following

settings, for example:

▷

If another key is detected on the driver's

door after activating the BMW ID or the

driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-

file of the last key detected is activated.

▷

Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.

Transferring the primary user role to an-

other BMW ID.

If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-

signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-

vated.

▷

Change vehicle-wide data protection set-

tings.

Create the main digital key.

Setting synchronization

If synchronization is switched on, settings from

the following areas, for example, are continu-

ously synchronized:

Additional information:

BMW Digital Key, refer to page 89.

Automatic driver recognition

If driver recognition has been established, au-

tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-

file is triggered by the following actions:

▷

BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.

Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home

address, or map settings.

▷

Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-

tions.

▷

By unlocking the vehicle using the button

on the assigned vehicle key.

iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-

guage, or units.

▷

By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.

The assigned vehicle key or the assigned

digital key must be carried with you.

Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-

tivation word.

▷

By automatic unlocking when approaching

the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the

assigned digital key must be carried with

you. Depending on the country, it may not

be possible to recognize the digital key.

Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling

and home lights.

Settings from the following areas are only

synchronized when you log in for the first time:

▷

Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s

seat position or temperature setting.

If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys

in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the

BMW ID or driver profile is done according to

the following priority:

▷

Data protection menu.

Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile

▷

The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers

the activation of the assigned BMW ID or

the assigned driver profile.

If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be

recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select

the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome

window.

The guest profile is activated when the ve-

hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-

signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.

▷

If a vehicle key and a digital key are de-

tected at the same time, the digital key trig-

74

Personal settings

CONTROLS

The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed

at any time via iDrive:

Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

2.

▷

"Manage BMW IDs"

2.

▷

"Change BMW ID"

"Change driver profile"

3.

Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or

the desired driver profile.

3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.

4. If necessary, enter the PIN.

Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes

the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW

App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized

with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the

BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is

deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is re-

moved, the guest profile is activated.

The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,

the stored settings are loaded.

Guest profile

The guest profile can be activated and

changed by anyone.

Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App

removes the corresponding BMW ID from the

vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with

the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the

BMW Cloud will be retained.

In the following cases the guest profile is auto-

matically active:

▷

A BMW ID has not yet been added or a

driver profile has not yet been created.

If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-

er’s My BMW App, it will also be removed from

the My BMW App of the other users. The cor-

responding BMW IDs are removed from the

vehicle.

▷

No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-

signed to the vehicle key or the digital key

that was used to unlock the vehicle.

The following limitations apply to the guest

profile:

If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is

removed from each user’s My BMW App, and

all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.

▷

Certain functions are not available, e.g.,

navigation functions or saving favorites.

▷

The guest profile cannot be renamed.

It is not possible to assign a PIN to the

guest profile.

Transfer of the vehicle key

A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or

a driver profile can be used to view or change

the stored personal settings.

▷

It is not possible to assign driver detection

to the guest profile.

In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-

zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.

Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-

sons, any assigned driver detection should be

canceled. Changes to the driver detection can

be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the

driver profile.

The guest profile is selected on the Welcome

screen or via iDrive:

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

The BMW Digital Key provides the option to

transfer a digital key to permit other persons

the use of your own vehicle.

2.

▷

"Change BMW ID"

"Change driver profile"

Additional information:

3. "Continue as guest"

BMW Digital Key, refer to page 89.

75

Personal settings

CONTROLS

Settings

System limits

A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or

the digital key may not always be possible in

the following cases, for example:

General information

Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-

ating a driver profile can be changed.

▷

The driver changes, but the vehicle is not

locked and unlocked.

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

▷

When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-

tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver

profile are located in the outer area on the

driver's side of the vehicle.

2. "Settings"

The following settings are available for the

BMW ID:

▷

When the vehicle was unlocked via the My

BMW App.

▷

The type of driver detection.

The profile picture.

The use of personal settings that are stored for

a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-

cal limitations. For example, settings may be

stored for a system that is not available, or

available in a non-compatible version, in other

vehicles.

The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.

The personal salutation.

The following settings are available for the

driver profile:

▷

The type of driver detection.

The profile picture.

The profile name.

Selecting a profile picture

The profile picture can be selected from the

predefined profile pictures:

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

2. "Settings"

3. "Manage profile picture"

4. "Select profile picture"

The personal profile picture for a BMW ID can

be adopted from the profile in the My BMW

App. This requires that the synchronization

with the BMW Cloud is activated in the set-

tings. After transferring the profile picture from

the My BMW App, you can only select one of

the predefined images if the profile picture in

the My BMW App is deleted or synchronization

is deactivated.

76

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

diately seek medical help if there is any sus-

picion that a battery or button cell battery has

been swallowed or is located in any part of

the body.

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Overview

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Vehicle key

General information

Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of

delivery, each containing an integrated key.

Buttons on the vehicle key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-

tery.

Icon

Meaning

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, various settings are possible

for the button functions.

Unlock.

A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-

tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.

Lock.

Pre-conditioning, refer to page 289.

To provide information on maintenance rec-

ommendations, the service data is stored in

the vehicle key.

Displaying the charging screen, refer

to page 152.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle

key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting

the vehicle.

Open the cargo area.

Panic mode.

Safety information

Pathway lighting, refer to page 165.

Warning

Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from an

authorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

The vehicle key has a button cell battery.

Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-

lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries

within two hours, for example due to internal

burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of

injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key

and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-

77

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-

Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-

placed by an authorized service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

ing.

If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID

or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle

key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can

then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-

file.

Replacing the battery

4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-

tive side facing down.

NOTICE

5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle

key.

Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-

vice can damage the device. There is a risk

of property damage. Always replace the dis-

charged battery with a battery with the same

voltage, the same size and the same specifi-

cation.

1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and

push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-

move it from the side.

6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.

Have old batteries disposed of by an

authorized service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop,

or take them to a collection point.

Batteries contain harmful chemicals. It

is prohibited by law to dispose of bat-

teries together with household waste.

2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-

cle key to the side.

Integrated key

General information

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked man-

ually using the integrated key.

Depending on the national-market version, the

integrated key will fit in the glove compart-

ment.

78

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Safety information

Unlocking the vehicle manually

1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-

ward with one hand.

Warning

For some national-market versions, unlock-

ing from the inside is only possible with par-

ticular knowledge.

If persons or animals spend a lengthy time

in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-

treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury

or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from

the outside when there are people or animals

in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals

alone in the vehicle.

2. Guide one finger of your other hand from

the back under the cover cap and push the

cover cap out.

Removing the integrated key

1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and

push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-

move it from the side.

Use the thumb for counter support to pre-

vent the cover cap from falling out of the

door handle.

3. Remove the cover cap.

2. Slide out the integrated key at the open

side of the vehicle key.

4. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key

by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle

key.

5. Open the driver's door.

6. Press the central locking button to unlock

the other doors.

79

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door

opener of the other doors from the inside.

In this case, use the vehicle key emergency

detection to switch off the alarm.

If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key

via the door lock, the alarm system will not be

activated.

Locking the vehicle manually

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,

do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.

Emergency detection of the vehicle

key

Overview

It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready

state if the vehicle key has not been detected.

Lock button for manual locking of the doors.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. To turn on drive-ready state via emergency

detection of the vehicle key, hold the back

of the vehicle key to the marking on the

steering column. Pay attention to the dis-

play in the instrument cluster.

Locking the vehicle

1. Close all doors.

2. Enter the vehicle on the front passenger's

side and close the front passenger door.

3. Press the central locking button to unlock

all doors.

2.

▷

If the vehicle key is detected:

Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-

onds.

If vehicle is de-energized: Press down the

lock buttons on all doors except the front

passenger door.

▷

If the vehicle key is not detected:

Slightly change the position of the vehi-

cle key and repeat the procedure.

4. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger

door.

5. Press down the lock button on the front

passenger door and close the front pass-

enger door.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed where

applicable.

6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are

locked. If necessary, repeat the process.

Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-

function under the following circumstances:

▷

The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.

Alarm system

If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated

key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-

tem will be triggered when the door is opened.

Fault of the radio link from transmission

towers or other equipment with high trans-

mitting power.

80

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

▷

Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal

objects.

If persons or animals spend a lengthy time

in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-

treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury

or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from

the outside when there are people or animals

in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals

alone in the vehicle.

Do not transport the vehicle key together

with metal objects.

Fault of the radio link from mobile phones

or other electronic devices in direct proxim-

ity to the vehicle key.

Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-

imity to other electronic devices.

Warning

▷

Fault of radio transmission by a charging

process of mobile devices, for instance

charging of a mobile phone.

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger

themselves and traffic, for example, due to

the following actions:

The vehicle key is located in direct proximity

of the wireless charging tray.

▷

Establishing standby.

Place the vehicle key in a different location.

Releasing the parking brake.

▷

Fault of the radio link while charging the

vehicle.

Opening and closing the doors or win-

dows.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can also

be unlocked and locked from the outside with

the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-

tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready

state.

▷

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-

mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-

hicle key with you when exiting and lock the

vehicle.

Access to vehicle interior

Safety information

Warning

Actions during unlocking

Depending on the settings, the following func-

tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-

cle:

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the

doors from the inside and lock themselves in.

In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened

from the outside. There is a risk of injury.

Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-

hicle can be opened from the outside.

▷

Only the driver's door will be unlocked or all

access to the vehicle will be unlocked.

The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-

firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.

The welcome light can be turned on when

the vehicle is being unlocked.

In addition, the following functions are exe-

cuted:

Warning

For some national-market versions, unlock-

ing from the inside is only possible with par-

ticular knowledge.

81

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

▷

If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned

to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver

profile will be activated.

With the vehicle key

Unlocking the vehicle

▷

The interior lights are switched on, unless

they were manually switched off.

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in

exterior mirrors are folded out.

If only the driver's door has been unlocked due

to the settings, press the button on the vehicle

key again to unlock the other vehicle access

points.

If the exterior mirrors were folded in using

the button inside the vehicle, they will not

fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.

The lighting functions may depend on the am-

bient brightness.

▷

Anti-theft protection is switched off.

The alarm system is switched off.

Additional information:

Locking the vehicle

1. Close the driver's door.

▷

Settings, refer to page 93.

Welcome lights, refer to page 164.

BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 72.

2.

Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

On the door handle

Principle

Actions during locking

Depending on the settings, the following func-

tions are performed when locking the vehicle:

▷

The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed

with a light signal or a sound signal.

The vehicle can be accessed without operating

the vehicle key.

▷

Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-

rior mirrors can be folded in automatically

when locking. The exterior mirrors are not

folded in when the hazard warning flashers

are switched on.

The vehicle key is automatically detected near

the vehicle.

General information

The function is available with Comfort Access.

The following functions are executed:

▷

All doors and the cargo area are locked.

Depending on national-market version, the ve-

hicle can also be unlocked and locked via the

door handle using a compatible smartphone

and digital key.

Anti-theft protection is switched on. This

prevents the doors from being unlocked us-

ing the lock buttons or the door openers.

▷

The alarm system is switched on.

Additional information:

If the drive-ready state is still turned on when

you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk

twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be

turned off using the Start/Stop button.

BMW Digital Key, refer to page 89.

Additional information:

Settings, refer to page 93.

82

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock

the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key

or use the integrated key.

Functional requirements

▷

Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your

pants pocket.

▷

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to unlock and lock using the digital

key.

Touchless unlocking/locking of the

vehicle

▷

To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be

outside of the vehicle near the doors.

Principle

When the driver approaches the locked vehicle

with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.

After locking, approx. 2 seconds must

elapse before unlocking is possible.

When the driver walks away from the unlocked

vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be

locked.

Unlock vehicle

General information

The function is available with Comfort Access.

The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-

ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking

zone.

The unlocking zone is located within a radius

of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the vehicle.

Fully grasp the handle of a front door.

The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key

leaves the locking zone.

The locking zone is located within a radius of

approx. 9 ft/2 m around the vehicle.

Locking the vehicle

1. Close the driver's door.

Depending on the national-market version,

touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-

ble for compatible smartphones with a digital

key. Enable Bluetooth on your smartphone to

do so.

2. With your finger, touch the grooved surface

on a closed front door handle for approx.

1 second without gripping the door handle.

If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking

zone for an extended period of time without

movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-

cally.

If someone is detected on a seat while locking

the vehicle, the following restrictions apply:

▷

The vehicle will be locked but not secured

against theft.

▷

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Malfunction

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-

ing request detection on the door handles.

Additional information:

BMW Digital Key, refer to page 89.

83

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Actions during unlocking

Locking/unlocking the vehicle

If the settings specify that only the driver's

door will be unlocked, note the following:

The driver's door and the charging socket flap

will only be unlocked when the driver is within

the unlocking zone of the driver's door.

Settings, refer to page 93.

Functional requirements

▷

Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your

pants pocket.

Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-

ter of the driver's door handle.

▷

Automatic unlocking and locking must be

activated in the settings.

When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,

make sure that all doors and the cargo area

are closed.

▷

The drive-ready state must be turned off.

If the vehicle has been in the idle state for

several days, contactless unlocking/locking

will only be available after the vehicle has

been driven.

If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change

the position of the Key Card and repeat the

procedure.

Additional information:

With the BMW Digital Key

Settings, refer to page 93.

Principle

With the Key Card

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, a digital key can be installed

on a compatible smartphone and used to un-

lock and lock the vehicle.

Principle

The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-

tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used

to unlock and lock the vehicle.

Additional information:

BMW Digital Key, refer to page 89.

Additional information:

Key Card, refer to page 87.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle

General information

The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.

Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at

the center of the driver's door handle. The po-

84

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

sition of the near field communication antenna

depends on the smartphone model.

Warning

When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,

make sure that all doors and the cargo area

are closed.

The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Make sure that the travel

path of the tailgate is clear during opening

and closing.

Frequently Asked Questions

What precautions can be taken to be able to

open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in

the vehicle key?

Warning

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the

windows and heating elements while driving.

There is a risk of injury or risk of property

damage. Cover the edges and ensure that

pointed objects do not hit the windows.

▷

The app’s remote services offer the option

to lock and unlock a vehicle.

This requires an active BMW Connected-

Drive contract, and the app must be instal-

led on a smartphone.

▷

Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via

the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.

With the vehicle key

An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is

required.

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,

do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Access to the cargo area

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the following settings can be

changed:

General information

The cargo area will be opened to the config-

ured opening height.

▷

Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle

key also unlocks the doors.

▷

Before unlocking the cargo area with the

vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.

Safety information

Functional requirements

To open the cargo area with the vehicle key,

the trailer power socket must not be occupied.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the travel path of the tailgate is

clear during opening and closing.

Selector lever position P must be engaged to

open the cargo area with the vehicle key.

You must enable the setting for opening with

the vehicle key.

Additional information:

Settings, refer to page 93.

85

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Opening the cargo area

Closing the cargo area

Press and hold the button on the vehi-

cle key for approx. 1 second.

On the cargo area

General information

With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be

accessed without activating the vehicle key.

The key is automatically detected near the ve-

hicle.

▷

Press the button on the trunk.

Depending on the national-market version,

compatible smartphones with a digital key are

also detected automatically. In this case, the

cargo area can be opened with a smartphone.

Press the button on the trunk.

The vehicle is locked after closing

the cargo area. To do so, the driv-

er's door must be closed and the vehicle

key must be outside of the vehicle near the

cargo area.

Additional information:

BMW Digital Key, refer to page 89.

▷

Pull the tailgate down slightly. The tailgate

closes automatically.

Functional prerequisites

▷

Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your

pants pocket.

Inside the vehicle

▷

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to detect the digital key.

Functional requirements

To open the cargo area using the button inside

the vehicle, the trailer power socket must not

be occupied.

Opening the cargo area

The vehicle key or digital key must be located

within the vehicle in order to close the cargo

area using the button inside the vehicle.

When the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-

tion P must be engaged before the tailgate can

be opened using the button inside the vehicle.

Opening the trunk

▷

Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-

ton on the cargo area.

Press the button in the driver's door.

With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key

with you and press the button on the cargo

area.

Locked doors are not unlocked.

86

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Closing the cargo area

Malfunction

Pull and hold the button in the driver's

door.

Warning

With manual operation of a blocked tailgate,

it can release itself unexpectedly from the

blocking. There is a risk of injury and risk

of property damage. Do not operate the tail-

gate manually if it is blocked. Have the vehi-

cle checked by an authorized service center

or another qualified service center or repair

shop.

An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is

closed.

Interruption of the opening

procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the

following situations:

▷

When the vehicle starts moving.

In the event of an electrical malfunction in the

automatic tailgate, operate the unlocked tail-

gate slowly with a smooth motion by hand.

By pressing the button on the outside of

the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the

cargo area again.

To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly

only. Closing occurs automatically.

▷

By pressing the button on the inside of the

cargo area. Pressing it again closes the

cargo area again.

By pressing the button on the vehicle key.

Key Card

Pressing the button again continues the

opening process.

Principle

▷

By pressing or pulling the button in the

driver's door. Pressing again continues the

opening procedure.

The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked

and locked, as well as started.

General information

Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-

ment and national-market version.

Interruption of the closing procedure

The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-

lowing situations:

A digital key that has already been paired with

the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The

digital key must be activated via iDrive.

▷

If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-

ment.

▷

By pressing the button on the outside of

the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the

cargo area again.

Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key

Card or take the Key Card with you because

the active Key Card can be used to start the

vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to

a service appointment.

▷

By pressing the button on the inside of

the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the

cargo area again.

By pressing the button on the vehicle key.

Pressing it again opens the cargo area

again.

By releasing the button in the driver's door.

Pulling again and holding continues the

closing motion.

87

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Deactivating Key Card

Safety information

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

NOTICE

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Digital Key"

If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the

wireless charging tray at the same time, the

Key Card could become damaged. There is

a risk of property damage. Do not place the

Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the

same time as a mobile device.

5. "Key Card"

6. "Deactivate Key Card"

A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of

paired digital keys.

Activating/deactivating Key Card in

the vehicle

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with

the activated Key Card.

General information

When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the

vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the

vehicle key.

Additional information:

Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 81.

Turning on the drive-ready state

A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of

paired digital keys.

Functional requirement

A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to

activate and deactivate the Key Card.

Activating Key Card

1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.

2. Place activated Key Card in the center of

the smartphone tray.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key

Card can be removed from the tray.

Malfunction

1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.

The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key

Card if there are objects between the smart-

phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or

smartphone case.

2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-

phone tray.

3. Follow instructions on the control display.

88

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

sary minimum charge of the rechargeable

battery depends on the smartphone.

BMW Digital Key

▷

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone for contactless unlocking and locking

using the digital key.

Principle

BMW Digital Key lets you lock and unlock and

start your vehicle using a digital key.

Enabling the main digital key

General information

BMW Digital Key availability and functionality

depend on vehicle equipment and national-

market version.

Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a

main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle

owner must prove his authorization for the ve-

hicle for this purpose.

BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-

ible smartphone or other compatible mobile

devices.

Proof of authorization can be started via the

My BMW App or using the activation code in

the corresponding smartphone function, e.g.,

the Wallet app.

To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible

smartphone, this function must be offered by

the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW

app can be used to check if the smartphone

and vehicle are compatible and which func-

tions are supported.

Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehi-

cle to be enabled.

Follow the activation instructions in the Digital

Key menu, on the app, or on the control dis-

play.

A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual

settings can be assigned to a digital key.

Sharing digital keys

When using a smartphone as a digital key, it is

helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card in the

vehicle. In situations where the vehicle is to be

given to another person, they can be given the

Key Card instead of the smartphone. To do so,

the Key Card must be activated via iDrive.

General information

Digital Key allows the sharing of digital keys

with other people. This option is available via

the smartphone that is enabled as main digital

key. This function must be supported by the

smartphone.

Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-

ice appointment.

Forwarding authorization

Additional information:

To share the digital key, select the correspond-

ing function on the smartphone, for instance in

the Wallet app.

▷

BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 72.

Key Card, refer to page 87.

As soon as a digital key is shared with another

person, the person will receive an invitation.

When the invitation is accepted, the digital key

on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.

Functional requirements

▷

The smartphone is compatible with BMW

Digital Key

The vehicle is linked with the Connected-

Drive account of the vehicle owner.

Authentication

Depending on the recipient’s smartphone

model, an authentication may be required for

security and safety reasons.

The rechargeable battery of the smart-

phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-

89

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key

or another method may be used for authenti-

cation. Follow the corresponding instructions

on the smartphone or the control display.

Resetting the function

To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-

thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-

hicle.

When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,

all digital keys including the main digital key

will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is

retained and deactivated.

Deleting digital keys

General information

Deleted digital keys will be removed from the

list of enabled digital keys.

After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be

unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.

Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.

The main digital key must be enabled again to

be able to use BMW Digital Key again.

Deleting the main digital key

The main digital key can be deleted from the

smartphone or via iDrive.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Digital Key"

The deletion of the main digital key is com-

pleted immediately.

5. "Reset function"

Deleting a shared key

Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-

phone with the master Digital Key, using the

smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,

or via iDrive.

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-

lows:

▷

Using the door handle.

The deletion via the smartphone using the

main digital key will not be performed until the

vehicle is used with a key other than the key to

be deleted.

With Comfort Access: depending on the na-

tional-market version, the vehicle can be

locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-

tion.

If the smartphone associated with a shared

key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it

will be deleted immediately.

BMW Digital Key availability and function-

ality depend on vehicle equipment and na-

tional-market version.

Deletion via iDrive

Additional information:

To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be

an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the

master Digital Key must be in the smartphone

tray.

Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 81.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Digital Key"

5. If necessary, select the digital key.

6. Delete the Digital Key.

90

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Turning on the drive-ready state

Sale of the vehicle

Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital

Key function or remove the vehicle from the

ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle

owner.

Using the smartphone tray

When the vehicle is removed from the Con-

nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-

hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key

is retained and deactivated.

System limits

The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-

sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off

with a digital key.

1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.

2. Place smartphone in the center of the

smartphone tray.

Additional information:

Ensure that the display is facing up.

Alarm system, refer to page 95.

3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.

Malfunction

Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-

function under the following circumstances:

4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on

drive-ready state.

Inside the vehicle

▷

The smartphone is shielded from the sen-

sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover

that is not suitable.

With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending

on the country, for the smartphone with Blue-

tooth enabled to be located inside the vehicle.

Press the Start/Stop button to turn on drive-

ready state.

Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card

are located between the smartphone and

the smartphone cover.

Fault of the connection from transmission

towers or other equipment with high trans-

mitting power.

Sale of the smartphone

Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior

to selling the smartphone. This ensures that

the smartphone can no longer be used for the

vehicle.

Shielding of the smartphone due to build-

ings or metal objects.

Buttons for the central

locking system

Changing smartphones

To use a new smartphone as a master Digital

Key, activate the new smartphone according to

the instructions for the master Digital Key. The

previous master key is deleted when the new

smartphone is activated.

General information

The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-

ing off.

In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle

is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning

system and interior lights are illuminated.

91

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

The other doors remain locked.

Overview

Soft-close automatic

function

Principle

The soft-close automatic function reduces ef-

fort and noise when closing vehicle doors.

The central locking buttons are located on the

front door.

The door can be pushed into the door lock

without effort and the door will close automati-

cally.

Lock.

Safety information

Unlock.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed while operating

the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure

that the area of movement of the doors is

clear while opening and closing.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button in the driver's door

or front passengers door with the front

doors closed.

Closing

To close the doors, push lightly.

The vehicle is not secured against theft when

locking.

The closing process is automatic.

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button in the driver's door or

front passenger’s door.

Valet parking mode

Principle

Opening the door

In the valet parking mode, the control display is

disabled.

▷

Press the button to unlock all the

doors.

E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle

is handed over for valet parking.

Pull the door opener above the arm-

rest.

▷

Front doors: pull the door opener on the

door to open the door. The other doors re-

main locked.

General information

Depending on the national-market version, the

valet parking mode may not be available.

Back doors: pull twice on the door opener

on the door to be opened; the first time

Valet Parking mode has the following restric-

tions:

92

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

▷

Vehicle settings cannot be changed via

iDrive.

If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the

access data for the BMW ID.

Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-

file cannot be changed.

▷

If the selected BMW ID does not have

an assigned PIN: enter the access data

for the BMW ID.

▷

Personal data cannot be displayed.

The audio system is muted, with the possi-

ble volume of the audio system being lim-

ited.

Settings

▷

The integrated Universal Remote Control is

deactivated.

General information

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, various settings for opening

and closing are possible.

Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned

off.

The availability of certain settings of the

driving modes is limited.

Unlocking and locking

The M1 and M2 buttons on the steering

wheel are not active.

Doors

Additional information:

1.

Apps menu

BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 72.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

Functional requirement

The driver has registered in the vehicle with a

BMW ID.

5. "Unlock"

6. Select the desired setting:

Activating the valet parking mode

▷

"Driver's door only"

1.

Apps menu

Only the driver's door is unlocked.

Pressing again unlocks the entire vehi-

cle.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Valet parking mode"

5. If necessary, "PIN"

▷

"All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

If the active BMW ID does not have an as-

signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The

PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-

ing mode.

Touchless unlocking/locking

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Comfort access"

5. Select the desired setting.

6. If necessary, enter the PIN.

7. "Activate valet parking mode"

Deactivating valet parking mode

1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock

screen.

Automatic unlocking

1.

Apps menu

2.

▷

Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.

2. "Vehicle"

93

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"

5. Select the desired setting:

Cargo area

▷

"Unlock doors at end of trip"

"Unlock doors when in P"

Cargo area and doors

If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically

when drive-ready state is turned off or selector

lever position P is engaged.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Tailgate"

Automatic locking

1.

Apps menu

5. Select the desired setting:

2. "Vehicle"

▷

"Tailgate"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

Depending on the equipment, the cargo

area will be unlocked or opened.

▷

"Tailgate and door(s)"

5. "Lock after a short time"

Depending on the equipment, the cargo

area will be unlocked or opened and the

doors are unlocked.

The vehicle locks automatically after a short

period of time if no door is opened after un-

locking.

▷

"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is

already unlocked"

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

1.

Apps menu

The vehicle must be unlocked before

the cargo area can be operated with the

vehicle key.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

"Lock tailgate button"

Operating the cargo area with the vehi-

cle key is disabled.

5. Select the desired setting:

▷

"Flash on lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice,

locking by flashing once.

Adjusting the opening height

You can set how far the tailgate can be

opened.

▷

With alarm system:

"Sound on lock/unlock"

When adjusting the opening height, make sure

the clearance above the tailgate is at least

4 in/10 cm.

Unlocking is confirmed with two sound

signals, locking is confirmed with one

sound signal.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Folding mirrors in automatically

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Tailgate"

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

5. "Opening height"

3. "Doors and windows"

6. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired

opening height.

94

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Opening the doors with the alarm

system switched on

Alarm system

The alarm system is triggered when a door

is opened if the door was unlocked using the

integrated key in the door lock.

Principle

The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic

signal when someone attempts to open the

locked vehicle incorrectly.

Opening the cargo area with the

alarm system switched on

The cargo area can be opened even when the

alarm system is switched on.

General information

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm

system reacts to the following changes:

After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will

be locked and monitored again. The hazard

warning system flashes once during closing.

▷

Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo

area.

▷

Movements in the vehicle interior.

Changes in the vehicle inclination such as

during attempts at stealing a wheel or

when towing the vehicle.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find

yourself in a dangerous situation.

▷

Disconnected battery voltage.

▷

Press the button on the vehicle key

and hold for at least 3 seconds.

Improper use of the socket for OBD on-

board diagnostics.

▷

Briefly press the button on the vehi-

cle key three times in succession.

▷

Locking the vehicle while a device is con-

nected to the diagnostic socket.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

The alarm system signals these changes visu-

ally and acoustically:

Indicator light on the interior mirror

▷

Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acous-

tic alarm may be suppressed.

▷

Optical alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning system

and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure function of

the alarm system.

Turning the alarm system on/off

The alarm system is turned on as soon as the

vehicle is locked from the outside.

▷

The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

The alarm system does not turn on if the vehi-

cle is locked manually from the inside.

The indicator light flashes for approx.

10 seconds, then flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched off as soon as

the vehicle is unlocked.

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor

are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate

95

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

are not correctly closed. Correctly closed

access points are secured.

▷

With animals in the vehicle.

When the vehicle is locked after start of re-

fueling.

When the remaining open access points

are closed, the interior motion sensor and

tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion

sensor can be switched off in such situations.

▷

The indicator light flashes even though all

access points have been closed:

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor

Alarm system error.

▷

The indicator light goes out after unlocking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

Press the button on the vehicle key

within 30 seconds as soon as the vehi-

cle is locked.

The indicator light flashes after unlocking

until drive-ready state is switched on, but

no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

The indicator light illuminates for approx.

2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The alarm has been triggered.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-

sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked

again.

Tilt alarm sensor

The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.

Ending the alarm

Unlock the vehicle.

The alarm system responds in situations such

as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-

cle is towed.

If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated

key, the drive-ready state must subsequently

be turned on via the emergency detection of

the vehicle key.

Interior motion sensor

The vehicle interior is monitored.

The alarm system triggers when movement is

detected inside the vehicle.

Window

The windows must be closed for the system to

function properly.

General information

When a window is frequently opened to the

same position, this task can be performed by

the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is

useful if you frequently use the same parking

garage, for example.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-

sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-

thorized action occurred.

Additional information:

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to

page 57.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

▷

In car washes.

In duplex garages.

During transport on trains carrying vehicles,

at sea or on a trailer.

96

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Depending on national-market version, the

windows can also be closed via the door han-

dle using a compatible smartphone and digital

key.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and

objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-

jury and risk of property damage. Make sure

that the travel path of the windows is clear

while opening and closing.

Additional information:

BMW Digital Key, refer to page 89.

Functional prerequisites

▷

Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance

in your pants pocket.

With the vehicle key

▷

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to close the window(s) using the dig-

ital key.

Opening windows

Press and hold the button on the vehi-

cle key after unlocking.

Closing the windows

The windows open for as long as the button

on the vehicle key is pressed.

Closing the windows

With Comfort Access: press and hold

the button on the vehicle key after lock-

ing.

The windows close for as long as the button

on the vehicle key is pressed.

With your finger, touch and hold the grooved

surface on a closed door handle without

grasping the door handle.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior

mirrors are folded in unless they were folded

in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not

folded in when the hazard warning flashers are

switched on.

In addition to locking, the windows also closed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior

mirrors are folded in unless they were folded

in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not

folded in when the hazard warning flashers are

switched on.

On the door handle

Principle

The windows can be closed using the door

handle without operating the vehicle key.

The vehicle key is automatically detected near

the vehicle.

General information

The function is available with Comfort Access.

97

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Inside the vehicle

Anti-trap mechanism

Overview

Principle

The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or

body parts becoming jammed between the

door frame and window while a window is be-

ing closed.

General information

If resistance or blockage is detected while a

window is being closed, the closing will be in-

terrupted.

Power windows

Safety information

Warning

Functional requirements

Accessories on the windows such as anten-

nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There

is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in

the area of movement of the windows.

▷

Standby state is switched on.

▷

Drive-ready state is switched on.

The vehicle key or digital key must be inside

the vehicle.

Closing without the anti-trap

mechanism

In case of danger from the outside or if icing

might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-

lows:

Opening windows

▷

Press the switch to the resistance

point.

The window opens while the switch

is being held.

▷

Press the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.

1. Pull the

switch past the resistance

point and hold it there.

The window opens automatically.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

The window closes with limited anti-trap

mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a

specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

Closing the windows

▷

Pull the switch to the resistance

point.

2. Pull the

switch past the resistance

point again within approx. 4 seconds and

hold it there.

The window closes while the switch

is being held.

▷

Pull the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.

The window closes without the anti-trap

mechanism.

The window closes automatically.

Pulling again stops the motion.

98

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Safety switch

Principle

The safety switch can be used to prevent chil-

dren, for instance, from opening and closing

the rear windows using the switches in the

rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the

safety function is switched off automatically.

Overview

The safety switch is located on the

driver's door.

Turning the safety functions on/off

To activate/deactivate the safety func-

tion, press the safety switch on the

driver’s door.

The LED in the button illuminates when the

safety function is switched on.

99

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

the protective effect of the seat belt can no

longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding

under the seat belt in an accident. There is a

risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat

prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest

so that it is in the most upright position as

possible and do not adjust again while driv-

ing.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Sitting safely

An ideal seat position that meets the needs of

the occupants can make a vital contribution to

relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

Warning

There is a danger of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Make sure that the travel

path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-

ment.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat

position plays an important role. Follow the in-

formation in the following chapters.

Additional information:

▷

Seats, refer to page 100.

Adjusting seats

Seat belts, refer to page 104.

Head restraints, refer to page 106.

Airbags, refer to page 172.

General information

The current seat position can be stored using

the memory function.

Seats

Overview

Safety information

Warning

Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-

pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-

trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,

injury, and property damage. Only adjust the

seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is

stationary.

The switches for setting the seats are located

on the front seats.

100

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Setting the longitudinal direction

Adjusting backrest tilt

Press switch forward or backward.

Tilt switch forward or backward.

Adjusting the height

Adjusting the seat position

automatically

General information

The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored

in the active BMW ID or in the active driver

profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is

reactivated at a later time, the saved position

will be called up automatically.

Activate/deactivate the function

Press switch up or down.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Adjusting seat tilt

3. "Seat comfort"

4. Select driver’s seat.

5. "Use automatically"

6. Select the desired setting.

Tilt switch up or down.

101

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Adjusting the backrest width

Thigh support

▷

Press the front section of the but-

ton:

Multifunctional seat

The backrest width decreases.

▷

Press the rear section of the button:

The backrest width increases.

Upper backrest

Principle

The upper backrest supports the back in the

shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a

relaxed seat position and reduces strain on the

shoulder muscles.

Push the switch in the front or back.

Lumbar support

General information

When exiting the vehicle, the upper backrest

moves all the way back. The last set position is

automatically applied before you start driving.

Principle

The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-

justed in a way that it supports the lumbar

region of the spine. The lower back and the

spine are supported for upright sitting position.

Adjusting the upper backrest

Adjusting the lumbar support

▷

Press the front/rear section of the

button:

The curvature is increased/de-

creased.

▷

Press the upper/lower section of the but-

ton:

The curvature is shifted up/down.

▷

Press the front section of the button:

The upper backrest is inclined forward.

Press the rear section of the button:

The upper backrest is inclined backward.

Backrest width

Principle

Adjusting the backrest width may improve side

support when cornering.

Front passenger seat functionality

General information

The backrest width is changed by adjusting

the side sections of the backrest.

Principle

The front passenger seat can be adjusted with

the switches of the driver's seat, for instance to

increase the legroom in the rear.

102

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

If needed, the memory position for the front

passenger seat can be stored.

General information

Eight different massage programs can be se-

lected:

Overview

▷

Hip activation.

Upper-body activation.

Whole body activation.

Back massage.

Buttons in the vehicle

Shoulder massage.

Lumbar massage.

Upper body training.

Whole-body exercise.

Overview

Front passenger seat functionality

Buttons in the vehicle

Turning on

1.

Press the button. The LED illumi-

nates.

2. Adjust the front passenger seat on the driv-

er's seat.

3. If needed, store the memory position for the

front passenger seat.

Massage function

Turning off

Turning on

Press the button. The LED goes out.

Press the button once for each inten-

sity level.

The function deactivates itself auto-

matically after some time.

The maximum intensity level is reached

when three LEDs are illuminated.

Seat massage

Principle

Turning off

The seat massage keeps your muscles relaxed

and improves blood circulation in the lumbar

region, which can help avoid fatigue.

Press and hold the button until the

LEDs turn off.

103

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Adjusting the massage program

Seat belts

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

General information

The vehicle is fitted with five seat belts to en-

sure occupant safety. However, they can only

offer protection when adjusted correctly.

3. "Seat comfort"

4. Select desired seat.

5. "Massage"

Always make sure that seat belts are being

worn by the occupants before driving off. The

airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-

ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-

place seat belts.

6. Select the desired setting.

Calibrating the front seats

General information

As soon as the electric seat setting no longer

functions precisely, a Check Control message

is displayed on the control display.

All seat belt anchorage points are designed to

achieve the best possible protective effect for

the seat belts when used properly and with the

correct seat settings.

To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-

ting, the front seats must be calibrated.

The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear

seats are intended for the persons sitting on

the left and right.

Safety information

The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is

intended for the person sitting in the middle.

Warning

Additional information:

There is a danger of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Make sure that the travel

path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-

ment.

Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 100.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one

person will potentially defeat the ability of

the seat belt to serve its protective function.

There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

Do not strap in more than one person per

single seat belt. Infants and children are not

allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be

transported and secured in designated child

restraint systems.

Calibrating the front seat

1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-

ward until the seat stops.

2. Press the switch forward again until the

seat stops.

As soon as the message on the control dis-

play disappears, the calibration is complete.

If the message remains active, repeat the cali-

bration.

If the message is still shown after repeated

calibration, have the vehicle checked by an

authorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Warning

The protective effect of safety gear, including

seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat

belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly

fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-

104

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

ries, for instance in the event of an accident,

▷

Avoid thick clothing.

braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk

of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all

occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.

Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward

around your upper body area.

Buckling the seat belt

1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder

and hip to put it on.

Warning

With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,

the protective effect of the middle seat belt

is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or

danger to life. If you are using the middle seat

belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.

2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt

buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage

audibly.

Warning

The protective effect of safety gear, including

seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail

in the following situations:

▷

The seat belts or seat belt buckles are

damaged, soiled, or changed in any

other way.

To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an

adjustable slider is available on the belt to help

position the buckle when not in use.

▷

Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders

were modified.

Unbuckling the seat belt

1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.

Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in

the event of an accident. There is a risk of

injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do

not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat

belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat

belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat

belts checked by an authorized service center

or another qualified service center or repair

shop.

2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.

3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt

winder.

Seat belt reminder

General information

Make sure that the seat belts are positioned

correctly.

Correct use of seat belts

▷

Wear the seat belt tight to your body over

your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.

The seat belt reminder becomes active in the

following situations:

▷

Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over

your lap. The seat belt must not press on

your stomach.

▷

When the seat belt on the driver's side or

on the passenger's side is not fastened.

When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-

ing.

▷

Do not rub the seat belt against sharp

edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard

or fragile objects.

When objects are lying on a seat.

105

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

3. "Rear Occupant Alert"

Display in the instrument cluster

4. Select the desired setting.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-

minates after turning on the drive-ready state

when the seat belt reminder is active.

Safety mode

A Check Control message is displayed where

applicable. Check whether the seat belt has

been fastened correctly.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver

and front passenger seat belt straps are auto-

matically tightened once after driving off, if the

seat belt is fastened.

Icon

Meaning

If necessary, in critical driving situations, e.g.,

during emergency braking, the front seat belts

are automatically pretensioned.

Seat belt on the driver's seat is

not buckled.

After a critical driving situation without an acci-

dent, the front seat belts are loosened again. If

the belt tension does not loosen automatically,

stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt us-

ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the

seat belt before continuing to drive.

Seat belt on the passenger

seat or another seat in the ve-

hicle is not buckled.

Seat belt is buckled on the cor-

responding seat.

Seat belt is not buckled on the

corresponding seat.

Front head restraints

General information

The current head restraint position can be

stored using the memory function.

Rear Occupant Alert

Principle

At the end of a trip, the system informs the

driver of the possible presence of occupants on

the rear seats.

Safety information

Warning

General information

Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-

straints can cause injuries in the head and

neck area. There is a risk of injury.

If a door with access to the rear seat row is

operated within 30 minutes before starting a

drive, a notice appears on the control display

and a signal tone sounds at the end of the

drive.

▷

Before driving, install the removed head

restraints on the occupied seats.

▷

Adjust the head restraint so its center

supports the back of the head at as

close to eye level as possible.

If the drive is continued within 30 minutes, the

notice is displayed again after the drive is com-

plete.

Activate/deactivate the function

1.

Apps menu

2. "System settings"

106

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

▷

Adjust the distance so that the head re-

Adjusting the distance

The distance to the back of the head is ad-

justed via the backrest inclination.

straint is as close as possible to the back

of the head. Adjust the distance via the

backrest tilt as needed.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint

is as close as possible to the back of the head.

For manually adjustable head restraints:

After adjusting, make sure that the head

restraint is correctly engaged.

Removing the head restraints

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the

head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement is clear when

moving the head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-

tective effect in the head and neck area.

There is a risk of injury.

Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-

tective effect in the head and neck area.

There is a risk of injury.

▷

Do not use seat or head restraint covers.

▷

Do not use seat or head restraint covers.

Do not hang objects, for instance clothes

hangers, directly on the head restraint.

Do not hang objects, for instance clothes

hangers, directly on the head restraint.

▷

Only use accessories that have been de-

termined to be safe for attachment to a

head restraint.

▷

Only use accessories that have been de-

termined to be safe for attachment to a

head restraint.

Do not use any accessories, for instance

pillows, while driving.

Do not use any accessories, for instance

pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

The height of the head restraints cannot be

set.

Adjusting the height

Removing the head restraint

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Exterior mirrors

General information

The front passenger's side exterior mirror is

more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Press switch up or down.

107

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the

active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If

the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated

at a later time, the stored position is called up

automatically.

Icon

Meaning

Fold the exterior mirror in and out.

Adjust the exterior mirrors.

The current exterior mirror adjustment can be

stored using the memory function.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver's

side exterior mirror also dims automatically.

Photocells in the interior mirror are used to

control this.

Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb

Monitor.

Depending on vehicle equipment, both exterior

mirrors are heated automatically as necessary

and when drive-ready state is on.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Press the button.

The selected exterior mirror moves

along with the button movement.

Safety information

Selecting the exterior mirror

Warning

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-

pear. The distance to the road users behind

could be incorrectly estimated, for instance

while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Estimate

the distance to the traffic behind by looking

over your shoulder.

Malfunction

In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the

exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the

mirror glass.

Overview

Folding in/folding out the exterior

mirrors

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle

can be damaged in car washes. There is a

risk of property damage. Before washing, fold

in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is possible at vehicle speeds of up to

approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-

ful in the following situations:

108

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

▷

In car washes.

Interior mirror, automatic

dimming feature

On narrow roads.

Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded

out automatically at a speed of approx.

25 mph/40 km/h.

General information

The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.

Automatic heating

Photocells are used for control:

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated

as needed and when the drive-ready state is

switched on.

▷

In the mirror glass.

On the rear of the mirror.

Overview

Automatic dimming

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-

tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior

mirror are used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor

Principle

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on

the passenger's side is tilted downward. This

improves your view of the curb and other low-

lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

Functional requirements

▷

Keep the photocells clean.

▷

Do not cover the area between the interior

mirror and the windshield.

Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor

1.

Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

2. Engage selector lever position R.

When the trailer power socket is occupied or

trailer towing is activated, the Automatic Curb

Monitor is deactivated.

Steering wheel adjustments while driving

can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-

ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There

is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-

age. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehi-

cle is stationary only.

Deactivating the Automatic Curb

Monitor

Slide the switch to the front passenger's side

exterior mirror position.

109

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Electric steering wheel adjustment

General information

Two memory locations with different settings

can be set for each driver profile.

General information

The steering wheel adjustment is stored in the

active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If

the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated

at a later time, the stored position is called up

automatically.

The settings for the lumbar support will not be

stored.

Safety information

The current steering wheel position can be

stored using the memory function.

Warning

Using the memory function while driving can

lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel

movements. Vehicle control could be lost.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Only retrieve the memory func-

tion when the vehicle is stationary.

To make it easier to enter and get out of the

vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily

into the upper position.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Warning

There is a danger of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Make sure that the travel

path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-

ment.

Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel

forward/back position and height to the seat

position.

Overview

Memory function

Principle

The following settings can be stored and, if

necessary, retrieved using the memory func-

tion:

The memory buttons are located on the front

doors.

▷

Seat position.

Exterior mirror adjustment.

Steering wheel position.

Height of the Head-up display.

110

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Storing settings

1. Set the desired position.

2.

Press the button. The LED illumi-

nates.

3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2

while the LED is illuminated. A signal

sounds.

Calling up settings

Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The stored position is called up.

The procedure stops when a seat setting

switch or one of the memory buttons is

pressed again.

The adjustment of the seat position on the

driver's side is interrupted after a short time

while driving.

Seat climate control

Various climate control functions are available

for the seats.

Additional information:

Climate control, refer to page 278.

111

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

Warning

A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,

especially children, or animals. There is a

risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave

people, especially children, or animals unat-

tended in the vehicle.

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Warning

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child

restraint systems and their components to

become very hot. Persons may sustain burn

injuries when touching the hot components.

There is a risk of injury. Do not expose

the child restraint system to direct sunlight

or cover where necessary. If necessary, let

the child restraint system cool down before

transporting a child. Do not leave children un-

attended in the vehicle.

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger

themselves and traffic, for example, due to

the following actions:

▷

Establishing standby.

Releasing the parking brake.

Children in the rear seat

Opening and closing the doors or win-

dows.

General information

▷

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

Accident research shows that the safest place

for children is in the rear seat.

Children younger than 13 years of age or

shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported

in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-

tems designed for the age, weight and size

of the child. Children 13 years of age or older

must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable

child restraint system can no longer be used

due to their age, weight, or size.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-

mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-

hicle key with you when exiting and lock the

vehicle.

112

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Safety information

Installing child restraint

systems

Warning

The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly

on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without

suitable additional child restraint systems.

The protective effect of safety gear, including

seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat

belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly

fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-

ries, for instance in the event of an accident,

braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk

of injury or danger to life. Secure children

shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child

restraint systems.

General information

Pay attention to the specifications and the op-

erating and safety information of the child re-

straint system manufacturer when selecting,

installing, and using child restraint systems.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint sys-

tems and their fastening systems which have

been damaged or exposed to an accident

can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-

erly restrained in the event of an accident,

braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk

of injury or danger to life.

Children on the front passenger

seat

General information

When using a child restraint system on the

front passenger seat, make sure that the front

passenger airbag is deactivated.

Do not use child restraint systems which

have been damaged or exposed to an acci-

dent.

If attachment systems have been damaged

or strained by an accident, have them

checked and replaced by an authorized serv-

ice center or another qualified service center

or repair shop.

Additional information:

Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-

bag, refer to page 174.

Safety information

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is

limited or compromised with incorrect seat

setting or improper installation of the child

seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

Make sure that the child restraint system fits

securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-

just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests

and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that

seats and backrests are securely engaged or

locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the

height of the head restraints or remove them.

Active front passenger airbags can injure a

child in a child restraint system when the air-

bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the front passenger airbags

are deactivated and that the PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.

113

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

On the front passenger seat

Child seat security

Deactivating the airbag

Warning

Active front passenger airbags can injure a

child in a child restraint system when the air-

bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the front passenger airbags

are deactivated and that the PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.

The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-

enger seat belt can be permanently locked to

fasten child restraint systems.

After mounting a child restraint system on the

front passenger seat, make sure that the front

passenger airbag is deactivated.

Locking the seat belt

1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.

Additional information:

Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-

bag, refer to page 174.

2. Secure the child restraint system with the

seat belt.

3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in

and pull it tight against the child restraint

system. The seat belt is disabled.

Seat position and height

After installing a child restraint system, move

the front passenger seat as far back as it will

go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest

position. This seat position and height ensure

the best possible position for the belt and of-

fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-

dent.

Unlocking the seat belt

1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in

completely.

After mounting a universal child restraint sys-

tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that

the belt is not constrained.

Lower anchors for child

restraint systems

If the upper attachment point of the seat belt

is located in front of the seat belt guide of the

child seat, move the front passenger seat care-

fully forward until the best possible seat belt

guide position is reached.

General information

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-

dren.

Backrest width

Pay attention to the specifications, operating

tips and safety instructions from the child re-

straint system manufacturer when selecting,

installing, and using child restraint systems.

Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a

child restraint system on the front passenger

seat, open the backrest width completely. Do

not change the backrest width again and do

not call up a memory position.

114

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Position

Mounts for lower anchors

Icon

Meaning

General information

The lower anchors may be used to attach the

CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child

and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child

is restrained by the internal harnesses.

The corresponding icon shows

the mounts for the lower

LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower an-

chors are marked with a pair

(2) of LATCH icons.

Safety information

For vehicles equipped with a

middle seat:

Warning

If the lower anchors on child restraint system

are not engaged correctly, the child restraint

system will not be able to provide suitable

protection. There is a risk of injury or danger

to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are

correctly engaged and that the child restraint

system fits securely against the backrest.

It is not recommended to use

the inner lower anchors of

standard outer LATCH posi-

tions to fasten a child restraint

system on the middle seat.

Use the vehicle seat belt in-

stead for the middle seat.

Warning

The mounts for the lower anchors and at-

tachment points of the child restraint system

are intended for attaching child restraint sys-

tems only. If other objects are attached, the

mounts or attachment points can be dam-

aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Only attach child restraint

systems at the corresponding mounts for the

lower anchors or attachment points.

115

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Opening/closing the cover

To open:

Installing child restraint systems

1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-

turer's information.

1. Grasp the lower edge of the cover and fold

it upwards.

2. Make sure that the child restraint system

mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-

chor on both sides.

Child restraint systems with

tether strap

General information

When attaching child restraint systems to the

upper attachment points, observe the specifi-

cations and the operating and safety informa-

tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.

2. Slide the lug on the outside of each back-

rest into the gap.

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used

for the child restraint system, the protective

effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-

sure that the upper retaining strap is guided

to the upper attachment point without twist-

ing and not over sharp edges.

To close:

1. Guide the cover down.

2. Slide the side section lug of the cover into

the lower gap on the outside of the respec-

tive backrest.

Warning

If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the

protective effect of the child restraint system

is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,

for instance braking maneuvers or in case of

an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold

forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to

life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests

are locked.

Before attaching child restraint

systems

Before installing a child restraint system, pull

the seat belt away from the lower anchors of

the child restraint system.

116

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Attaching the upper retaining strap

to the attachment point

1. Guide the upper strap over or along both

sides of the head restraint rods to the at-

tachment point.

Warning

The mounts for the lower anchors and at-

tachment points of the child restraint system

are intended for attaching child restraint sys-

tems only. If other objects are attached, the

mounts or attachment points can be dam-

aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Only attach child restraint

systems at the corresponding mounts for the

lower anchors or attachment points.

2. Guide the retaining strap between the

backrest and the cargo cover.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the

mounting eye.

4. Tighten the retaining strap.

Locking the doors and

windows in the rear

Attachment points for upper

retaining strap

Icon

Meaning

General information

In certain situations it may be advisable to se-

cure the rear doors and windows, for instance

when transporting children.

The respective icon shows the

attachment point for the upper

retaining strap. Seats with an

upper top tether are marked

with this icon. It is located on

the rear seat backrest, the rear

shelf or the rear seat.

Doors

Routing the retaining strap

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the outside

only.

1

Driving direction

After locking, make sure that the door cannot

be opened from the inside.

2

3

4

5

6

Head restraint

Hook for upper retaining strap

Attachment point/eye

Seat backrest

Upper retaining strap

117

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Safety switch for rear

Press the button on the driver's door.

Various functions are locked and can-

not be operated in the rear such as the

power windows.

118

Driving

CONTROLS

Driving

Overview

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Start/Stop button

Principle

Pressing the Start/Stop button turns drive-

ready state on/off.

Driving off

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Depress brake pedal.

General information

Drive-ready state turns on when the brake

pedal is pressed while pushing the Start/Stop

button.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

4. Engage the desired selector lever position,

e.g., D or R.

Pressing the Start/Stop button again turns

drive-ready state back off and turns standby

state back on.

5. Release the parking brake.

6. To drive off, release the brake pedal and

press the accelerator pedal.

Drive-ready state cannot be turned on as long

as the charging cable is connected or the

charging socket cover is open.

If necessary, the combustion engine starts

automatically.

Additional information:

Acoustic pedestrian protection

▷

Drive-ready state, refer to page 45.

Standby state, refer to page 45.

Charging cable, refer to page 330.

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection

generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-

cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.

▷

With a stationary vehicle and drive-ready

state turned on, as soon as the selector

lever position P is exited.

▷

With electric drive up to approx.

20 mph/30 km/h.

A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the

environment. As a result, other road users,

119

Driving

CONTROLS

for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better

perceive the vehicle.

Display in the instrument cluster

When the drive-ready state

is switched on, READY is dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

If necessary, the combustion en-

gine starts automatically.

Auto Start/Stop function

Principle

The Auto Start/Stop function helps to conserve

fuel. The system shuts off the combustion en-

gine when the requirements for electric drive

are met. Drive-ready state remains switched

on.

Safety mode

If the combustion engine is stopped automati-

cally, it will not start automatically in the follow-

ing situations:

▷

With the driver's door open, if neither the

brake pedal nor the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed, and the driver's seat belt is not

fastened.

General information

The combustion engine is also stopped during

the trip when rolling without acceleration or

braking.

▷

When the hood is unlocked.

The indicator lights come on. The combustion

engine can only be started using the Start/

Stop button.

The combustion engine is not switched off au-

tomatically in the following situations:

▷

Combustion engine is not at operating tem-

perature.

Switching off the vehicle during an

automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle

can be switched off permanently, for instance

when leaving it. To do so, proceed as follows:

▷

Selector lever is in position S.

The high-voltage battery is heavily dis-

charged or the vehicle electrical system is

under heavy load.

▷

The automatic climate control is under

heavy load during the heating/cooling

phase.

1. Press the Start/Stop button.

▷

Drive-ready state is turned off and

standby state turned on.

▷

If the hybrid system may not be opera-

tional.

▷

Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

Dynamic Stability Control is restricted or

disabled.

Selector lever position P is engaged au-

tomatically.

▷

The hood is unlocked.

2. Set the parking brake.

The vehicle is optimized for the current

driving style, e.g., during the break-in pe-

riod.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer

switches off the combustion engine automat-

ically in the event of a malfunction. A Check

Control message is displayed. It is possible to

continue driving. Have the vehicle checked.

120

Driving

CONTROLS

Functional requirements

Functions while driving

Electric driving

General information

▷

The high-voltage battery charge is suffi-

ciently high.

The drive power is a combination of the inter-

nal combustion engine and the electric drive.

If required, the high-voltage battery is charged

at the same time. The hybrid system starts the

combustion engine automatically.

▷

The high-voltage battery temperature is not

too low and not too high.

▷

Selector lever position D or R engaged.

The accelerator pedal is not pressed with

too much force.

With electric drive, the vehicle is powered by

the electric motor.

▷

The possible maximum speed for electric

drive is not exceeded.

For electric drive and driving with the combus-

tion engine, the corresponding requirements

must be met.

Automatic starting of the combustion

engine while driving

Depending on vehicle configuration, the com-

bustion engine is automatically started when

driving under conditions such as the following:

Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en-

ergy. To optimize acceleration and to reduce

fuel consumption, the electric motor boosts the

combustion engine.

Depending on the charge state of the high-

voltage battery, maximum speed, the vehicle's

capacity to accelerate, and range can vary.

▷

When accelerating heavily or on uphill

grades.

System performance is reduced if the charge is

low. Acceleration capacity may change notice-

ably.

▷

By pressing the accelerator pedal beyond

the resistance point at the full throttle posi-

tion, kickdown.

▷

The charge state of the high-voltage bat-

tery is insufficient.

Safety information

High-voltage battery temperature is too

high or too low.

Warning

▷

Selector lever position S is engaged.

When driving in electric mode, pedestrians

and other road users might pay less attention

to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Adjust driving style to traffic

conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate

During manual gear-shifting using the shift

paddles.

▷

Depending on vehicle equipment and na-

tional-market version: When using antici-

patory hybrid drive with active route guid-

ance, e.g., out of town.

▷

For system-related demand from hybrid

components.

Automatic switching-off of the

combustion engine while driving

Depending on the driving situation, the com-

bustion engine is shut off if the requirements

for electric drive are met.

121

Driving

CONTROLS

Energy recovery

Anticipatory hybrid drive

Principle

With energy recovery, also called recuperation,

the electric motor acts as an alternator and

converts the vehicle's kinetic energy into elec-

trical energy when braking and coasting.

This system ensures the optimal distribution

of available electric power so that the vehicle

can be driven electrically when using the navi-

gation system’s route guidance in urban areas

and near the destination. If the high-voltage

battery is sufficiently charged, additional seg-

ments of the route will be selected for electric

drive.

This recovered energy charges the high-volt-

age battery. If necessary, this stored electrical

energy is output to the electric motor.

General information

Downhill gradients, for example, are taken into

account to ensure efficient energy recovery.

Depending on the M Setup menu settings:

The high-voltage battery is charged at differ-

ent speeds, and the vehicle is decelerated at

different forces while coasting.

Depending on the route section, the combus-

tion engine is automatically switched on or off,

which supports an efficient driving style and

emission-free driving in the inner city.

Setting Description

"MIN"

Setting for low energy recovery.

Depending on the route and driving style, this

function may affect the overall energy con-

sumption.

"MAX" Setting for maximum energy recov-

ery.

If the vehicle is set to electric drive, the hybrid

drive turns on automatically if the route to

be driven is longer than the available electric

range. This ensures that the electric drive is

planned efficiently when using anticipatory hy-

brid drive.

Energy recovery settings can be configured in

the M Setup menu. Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 210.

Functional requirements

Conditions such as the following prerequisites

must be met to recover kinetic energy:

If a situation requiring greater acceleration is

expected, the combustion engine may start

automatically, depending on the engine, in or-

der to prepare for this acceleration.

▷

The vehicle is moving.

Selector lever position D/S is set.

The high-voltage battery is not fully

charged.

Functional requirements

▷

The function must be available in the coun-

try in which the vehicle is driven.

Support from the electric motor

During normal driving, the electric motor as-

sists the combustion engine, depending on the

situation.

▷

Selector lever position D is engaged.

Route guidance is enabled.

SPORT driving mode is not activated.

eCONTROL mode is deactivated.

Accelerating quickly such as when passing re-

quires the maximum available power from the

electric motor. To do so, press the accelerator

pedal firmly.

122

Driving

CONTROLS

Displays

Overview

Example of anticipatory hybrid drive before

reaching an urban area: The electric drive is

prepared. The vehicle switches automatically

to electric drive upon reaching an urban area.

The shift paddles for Boost Control are located

on the steering wheel.

Display in the instrument cluster

Live Vehicle also shows other situations:

▷

Downhill gradient: The vehicle is driven

electrically on the downhill gradient and the

high-voltage battery is charged.

▷

Target zone: Electric drive is preferred in

the target zone.

The icon is displayed on Live Vehicle

when the function is enabled.

Additional information:

▷

Arrow 1: Function has been activated.

Live Vehicle, refer to page 139.

Arrow 2: Function is available as long as

the bar with BOOST appears.

▷

Arrow 3: Function is being used for maxi-

mum acceleration.

Boost Control function

Principle

Using the function

1. Pull and hold the left shift paddle until

BOOST is displayed.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the Boost

Control function can be used for upcoming ac-

celeration, for example.

▷

The function is active.

The system may provide additional drive

power for a limited time.

A countdown is displayed as a bar in the

instrument cluster.

General information

The Boost Control function is operated using

the shift paddles on the steering wheel.

2. Before the countdown has finished, de-

press the accelerator pedal.

▷

BOOST is displayed on the instrument

cluster.

123

Driving

CONTROLS

Stopping and restarting the function Overview

The function is automatically interrupted if the

Selector lever

countdown has finished or if the function was

used in the acceleration process. Once this

function has been stopped, it can only be re-

started after waiting 30 seconds.

To restart the countdown, pull and hold the left

shift paddle again until the countdown is reset.

Deactivating the function

Pull and hold the right shift paddle until this

display goes out.

Selector lever functions

M Steptronic Sport

transmission

Icon

Function

DriveLogic modes.

Reverse gear.

Neutral.

General information

The M Steptronic Sport transmission is oper-

ated via the selector lever or the two shift pad-

dles on the steering wheel.

R

N

Center position, forward posi-

tion.

The following functions are available:

▷

Various driving programs: Drive mode or

sequential mode.

-

Downshifting, manual.

Upshifting, manual.

+

▷

Low Speed Assistant.

D/S

Drive mode or sequential

mode.

Various Drivelogic programs.

Launch Control.

P

Parking.

Upshifting display, Shift lights.

Selector lever positions

Safety information

D is Drive mode

Selector lever position for driving. All gears for

forward travel are activated automatically.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and

possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,

injury, and property damage. Before leaving

your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,

e.g., by applying the parking brake.

S is Sequential mode

Selector lever position for driving. All gears for

forward travel must be shifted manually.

124

Driving

CONTROLS

R is reverse

Functional requirements

Engage selector lever position R only when the

vehicle is stationary.

Only when the drive-ready state is switched on

and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible

to change from selector lever position P to an-

other selector lever position.

N Neutral

In selector lever position N, the vehicle may be

pushed or roll without power, for instance, in

car washes.

Engaging selector lever position D/S,

N, R

P Park

Selector lever position, for instance for parking

the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive

wheels in selector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only when the

vehicle is stationary.

Selector lever position P is engaged automati-

cally in situations such as the following:

With the driver's seat belt fastened, press on

the brake pedal and pull or push the selector

lever in the required direction. The selector

lever automatically returns to the center posi-

tion when released.

▷

After the drive-ready state or standby state

is switched off and selector lever position

D/S or R is engaged.

After the standby state has been switched

off when selector lever position N is en-

gaged.

In selector lever position R, the selector lever

locks.

The driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the driv-

er's door is opened, and the brake pedal is

not pressed while the vehicle is stationary

and the selector lever is set to D/S or R.

Engaging selector lever position P

Engaging a selector lever position

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you

select a gear position or reverse gear, main-

tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are

ready to drive off.

Press button P.

The engaged selector lever position is dis-

played in the instrument cluster and on the

selector lever.

In certain situations, e.g., to rock free on snow,

it is possible to shift between reverse gear and

gear position D without pressing the brake.

125

Driving

CONTROLS

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum drive

power in Drive mode.

General information

In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to

roll without its own drive for a short distance,

for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.

Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-

sistance point at the full throttle position.

Drive mode D/S

Engaging selector lever position N

Principle

NOTICE

In Drive mode, all forward gears are automati-

cally changed.

Selector lever position P is automatically en-

gaged when standby state is switched off.

The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of

property damage. Do not switch off standby

if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car

wash.

Activating Drive mode

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing

on the brake pedal.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold.

Automatic Hold, refer to page 133.

4. If necessary, loosen the belt.

5. If necessary, open the door.

Push the selector lever out of the center posi-

tion in the D/S direction.

Drive mode is activated. The engaged gear is

displayed in the instrument cluster along with a

D, e.g., 1 D.

6. Depress the brake pedal.

7. Engage selector lever position N.

8. Switch off drive-ready state.

Deactivating Drive mode

Push the selector lever out of Drive mode

in the D/S direction. Sequential mode is acti-

vated.

In this way, standby state remains switched

on, and a Check Control message is dis-

played.

The vehicle can roll.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster, e.g., 1.

Selector lever position P is engaged automati-

cally after approximately 35 minutes.

If the system is not operational, you may not

be able to change the selector lever position.

Sequential mode D/S

Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if

needed.

Principle

In sequential mode, it is possible to shift gears

manually using the selector lever or the shift

paddles without letting off the gas.

Additional information:

Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,

refer to page 129.

126

Driving

CONTROLS

General information

Shortly before falling below a gear-dependent

minimum speed, the transmission is automati-

cally downshifted.

Shifting

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine

and road speeds; for instance, downshifting is

not possible if the engine speed is too high.

Once the maximum engine speed is attained,

upshifting is not automatically performed in

sequential mode and the kickdown is deacti-

vated.

Temporary sequential mode

After a shift paddle is actuated in Drive mode,

the system temporarily switches to sequential

mode.

It is also possible to drive off in 2nd gear;

for instance, on icy roads.

After conservative driving in sequential mode

without acceleration or shifting via the shift

paddles for a certain amount of time, the

transmission switches back to Drive mode.

Activating sequential mode

Permanent sequential mode

Sequential mode remains permanently active if

it was active before the shift paddle was actu-

ated.

Switching to Drive mode

Push the selector lever out of Drive mode in

the D/S direction, arrow 1, or shift via the selec-

tor lever, arrows at 2.

It is possible to switch to Drive mode as fol-

lows: pull and hold the right shift paddle.

Switching via the shift paddles

Sequential mode is activated. The engaged

gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g.,

1.

Deactivating sequential mode

Push the selector lever out of the center po-

sition in the D/S direction. Drive mode is acti-

vated.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster along with a D, e.g., 1 D.

▷

Upshift: pull right shift paddle.

Downshift: pull left shift paddle.

Gear change

Principle

Display on the selector lever

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow

you to change gears quickly while keeping

both hands on the steering wheel.

The actually engaged transmission position

can deviate from the selector lever position in

some situations. The display in the selector

lever flashes.

127

Driving

CONTROLS

Observe the display in the instrument cluster in

these cases.

Activating

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing

on the brake pedal.

Displays in the instrument cluster

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold.

4. Engage selector lever position D/S or R.

5. Release brake.

Drive mode

▷

Engaged gear together with

a D, arrow 1.

In 1st and 2nd gear and in reverse, the vehicle

rolls at minimum speed.

Selected Drivelogic program,

arrow 2.

Deactivating

Decelerate the vehicle to a stop.

Sequential mode

▷

Gear shift indicator, arrow 1.

Drivelogic

Engaged gear, arrow 2.

Selected Drivelogic program,

arrow 3.

Principle

Drivelogic changes the gear-shifting character-

istics of the M Steptronic Sport transmission.

For example, the shifting points are changed in

Drive mode and the shifting times in sequential

mode.

Notice

When the outside temperature is very low, the

display may not work. Current driving direction

is recognizable at the engaged selector lever

position.

General information

Three Drivelogic programs are available.

Low Speed Assistant

Whenever you switch between Sequential

mode and Drive mode, the last program se-

lected is enabled.

Principle

The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at

very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking

speed.

If drive-ready state is switched on after the ve-

hicle has been idle, DriveLogic program D1 is

enabled in Drive mode.

General information

Use the Low Speed Assistant for maneuvering

or in stop-and-go traffic.

The Low Speed Assistant can also be used

for rocking the vehicle free in the snow. To do

this, change over between reverse gear and

forward gear without stepping on the brakes in

the process.

128

Driving

CONTROLS

3. "Drivelogic"

Functional requirement

4. Select the desired DriveLogic mode.

The vehicle must be in one of the following

hybrid modes:

The setting is immediately applied with ac-

tive M1 or M2 configuration.

▷

"HYBRID"

To activate the desired configuration with the

selected settings, press the corresponding but-

ton on the steering wheel:

Drivelogic programs

Pro-

Drive mode

Sequential

mode

▷

gram

Efficient driving.

Comfortable

shifting opera-

tions.

▷

D1/S1

Fast driving.

Sporty, fast shift-

ing operations.

Additional information:

D2/S2

D3/S3

M Setup menu, refer to page 210.

Sporty driving.

Maximum shift-

ing speed.

Display in the instrument cluster

The DriveLogic program se-

lected corresponds to the num-

ber of illuminated fields.

Selecting a DriveLogic program

Via the rocker switch on the selector lever

Electronic unlocking of the

transmission lock

General information

Unlock the transmission lock electroni-

cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a

hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.

Unlocking is possible if there is a sufficient 12-

volt electrical system voltage.

Press the rocker switch repeatedly until

the desired DriveLogic program is dis-

played on the instrument cluster.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the

parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing away.

Via iDrive

The desired DriveLogic program can be con-

figured for buttons M1, M2, or M Setup.

Engaging selector lever position N

1. Quickly press the Start/Stop button three

times without pressing the brake.

1.

Press the button.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2

CONFIGURATION"

3. Press the selector lever to position N.

129

Driving

CONTROLS

An appropriate Check Control message is

displayed.

Display in the instrument cluster

Position N is indicated on the selector lever.

4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous

area and secure it against rolling away.

Additional information:

Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 390.

Launch Control

▷

Arrows 1: Function has been activated.

Arrow 2: Function is being used for maxi-

mum acceleration.

Principle

Launch Control enables optimum acceleration

on roads with good traction under dry sur-

rounding conditions.

Starting with launch control

1. Turn on drive-ready state.

General information

The use of Launch Control causes premature

component wear since this function represents

a very heavy load for the vehicle.

2. With your left foot, forcefully press down on

the brake.

3. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal

beyond the resistance point at the full throt-

tle position, kickdown.

Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.

Do not steer the steering wheel when driving

off with Launch Control.

A destination flag is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

Additional information:

Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.

Break-in, refer to page 310.

4. The starting engine speed adjusts. Release

the brake as soon as a flag symbol is

shown on the instrument cluster, or within

3 seconds of the flag symbol appearing.

The vehicle accelerates.

Functional requirements

Launch Control is available when the engine

is at operating temperature. The engine is at

operating temperature after an uninterrupted

trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.

The vehicle upshifts automatically, even in

sequential mode, as long as the destination

flag is displayed and the accelerator pedal

is not released.

In addition, one of the following prerequisites

must be met:

▷

M Dynamic Mode activated.

Repeated use during a trip

Dynamic Stability Control deactivated.

After Launch Control has been used, it is

necessary to drive a certain distance before

Launch Control can be used again. Launch

Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions,

when used again.

130

Driving

CONTROLS

After using Launch Control

Safety information

To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic

Stability Control as soon as possible.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and

possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,

injury, and property damage. Before leaving

the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling

away.

System limits

An experienced driver may be able to achieve

better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured

against rolling away, follow the following:

Drive-off assistant

▷

Set the parking brake.

Principle

Automatic transmission: Make sure that

selector lever position P is engaged.

On inclines, in selector lever position D, S, or

R, this system prevents the vehicle from rolling

opposite the set driving direction and provides

drive-off support.

▷

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

turn the front wheels in the direction of

the curb.

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

also secure the vehicle, for instance with

a wheel chock.

Driving off

Engage a gear position and step on the accel-

erator pedal to drive off.

The parking brake is released automatically.

Warning

Depending on the load and driving situation or

when a trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back

slightly.

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger

themselves and traffic, for example, due to

the following actions:

If necessary, activate Automatic Hold.

Additional information:

▷

Establishing standby.

Automatic Hold, refer to page 133.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or win-

dows.

Parking brake

▷

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

Principle

The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-

cle from rolling away when it is parked.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-

mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-

hicle key with you when exiting and lock the

vehicle.

131

Driving

CONTROLS

Engaging the parking brake

automatically

Overview

In some situations, the parking brake is en-

gaged automatically, e.g., through Automatic

Hold.

Additionally, the system can be set to auto-

matically engaging the parking brake when the

drive-ready state is turned off.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Parking brake

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Drivetrain and chassis"

5. "Parking brake"

Setting the parking brake

6. Select the desired setting.

In selector lever position N, the parking brake

will not be engaged automatically.

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED illuminates.

Releasing the parking brake

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster illuminates red.

Releasing the parking brake manually

1. Turn on drive-ready state.

The parking brake is set.

2.

Press the switch while stepping on

the brake pedal or selector lever position P

is set.

While driving

Use while driving serves as an emergency

braking function.

The LED and the indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle

brakes hard while the switch is pulled.

Releasing the parking brake

automatically

The parking brake is released automatically

when you drive off.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,

and the brake lights illuminate.

A Check Control message is displayed.

The LED and the indicator light go out.

The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-

cle is stationary.

132

Driving

CONTROLS

Using the parking brake via iDrive

The parking brake can be engaged or disen-

gaged via iDrive. Additionally, further informa-

tion is displayed.

Automatic Hold

Principle

Automatic Hold provides assistance by auto-

matically applying and releasing the brake,

e.g., when driving off on inclines or in stop-

and-go traffic.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Drivetrain and chassis"

5. "Parking brake"

The vehicle is automatically held in place when

it is stationary.

6. Select the desired setting.

General information

The parking brake is automatically engaged

under the following conditions:

Malfunction

If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-

cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away

before you exit.

▷

If drive-ready state is turned off.

The driver’s door is open for more than one

second and no pedal is pressed during this

time.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-

stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of

the vehicle.

▷

If the parking brake is used to brake the

vehicle to a stop while driving.

In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold is

temporarily deactivated.

After a power interruption

To reestablish parking brake operability after

a power interruption, an initialization may be

required.

Safety information

Warning

1. Turn on standby state.

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and

possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,

injury, and property damage. Before leaving

the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling

away.

2.

Pull the switch while stepping on the

brake pedal or selector lever position P is

set and then push.

This process may take a few seconds. Some

mechanical sounds associated with this proc-

ess are normal.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured

against rolling away, follow the following:

▷

Set the parking brake.

The indicator light is no longer illumi-

nated as soon as the parking brake is

ready for operation again.

Automatic transmission: Make sure that

selector lever position P is engaged.

133

Driving

CONTROLS

▷

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

turn the front wheels in the direction of

the curb.

Activating Automatic Hold

1. Turn on drive-ready state.

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

also secure the vehicle, for instance with

a wheel chock.

2.

Press the button.

The LED illuminates.

The indicator light illuminates green.

Automatic Hold is activated.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle

can cause the vehicle to move and endanger

themselves and traffic, for example, due to

the following actions:

Automatic Hold holding the vehicle

Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s

door is closed.

▷

Establishing standby.

After stopping, the vehicle is automat-

ically secured against rolling away as

soon as the indicator light illuminates

green.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing the doors or win-

dows.

▷

Engaging selector lever position N.

Using vehicle equipment.

Automatic parking brake application

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-

mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-

hicle key with you when exiting and lock the

vehicle.

The parking brake is automatically set if drive-

ready state is switched off while the vehicle is

being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle

is exited.

The indicator light changes from green

to red.

Overview

The parking brake is not set automatically if

the drive-ready state was switched off while

the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is

temporarily deactivated in this case.

Driving off

Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.

The brake is released automatically and the

indicator light of the parking brake is no longer

illuminated.

Automatic Hold

The vehicle may roll back slightly when driving

off, depending on the load and driving situation

or when towing a trailer.

Use the parking brake as needed to prevent

the vehicle from rolling back when driving off.

134

Driving

CONTROLS

Deactivate Automatic Hold

Overview

Press the button.

The LED goes out.

Button in the vehicle

The indicator light goes out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated.

If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,

also press the brake pedal when deactivating.

M Hybrid

M HYBRID

Principle

The behavior of the hybrid system can be ad-

justed.

Selecting a mode

Using the button

General information

Different settings for the hybrid system are

provided.

Press the button and select the desired

mode on the control display.

Mode

Behavior of hybrid system

Via M1/M2

The desired mode can be configured for the M1

or M2 button on the steering wheel.

"HYBRID"

The vehicle is moved in hy-

brid mode, i.e., it is driven by

a combination of combustion

engine and electric motor.

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 210.

"ELECTRIC" The vehicle is driven exclu-

sively by electric power.

Drive system

"eCONTROL" With sufficient fuel, the high-

voltage battery charge is

maintained and saved for a

later point in the drive.

Principle

The drive’s response to movement of the ac-

celerator pedal can be adjusted. The intensity

of the drive acoustics changes depending on

the program.

135

Driving

CONTROLS

Overview

Display in the instrument cluster

When the display for M Setup is acti-

vated in the instrument cluster, the se-

lected program is displayed.

Button in the vehicle

Additional information:

Central display area, refer to page 153

Sound control

Principle

Sound Control changes the sound characteris-

tics of the exhaust system.

SETUP

General information

When Sound Control is turned on, the exhaust

system sounds sporty and emotive.

Programs

Program

Response characteristics

Comfortable.

When sound control is switched off, the sound

is focused on comfort.

"COMFORT"

"SPORT"

The sound characteristics are changed during

the engine warm-up phase.

Sporty, dynamic.

"SPORT

PLUS"

Spontaneous, direct. Maxi-

mum dynamics.

Additional information:

High-performance drive, refer to page 308.

When Sound Control is on, the SPORT and

SPORT PLUS programs change the intensity

of the drive acoustics.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Additional information: Sound Control, refer to

page 136.

Selecting a program

Using the button

Press the button and select the desired

program on the control display.

Via iDrive

Drive settings can be configured in M Setup.

Sound control

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 210.

136

Driving

CONTROLS

Activate/deactivate the function

Using the button

Press button to activate or deactivate

the sound control.

Depending on the equipment, a Check Control

message is displayed when the Sound Control

is turned on or an LED will illuminate in the

button.

Via iDrive

The Sound Control settings can be configured

in M Setup.

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 210.

137

Displays

CONTROLS

Displays

Safety information

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Warning

If the driving information displays on the in-

strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,

do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. Imme-

diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.

Turning drive-ready state off and on again

may correct the malfunction, allowing you to

continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be

corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-

thorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Instrument cluster

Principle

The instrument cluster comprises various digi-

tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,

temperature as well as indicator and warning

lights.

Overview

General information

Some of the displays in the instrument cluster

may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's

Manual.

The view on the instrument cluster can vary

depending on the selected driving mode. The

driving mode is set using the M MODE button.

The following M MODE views are available:

Instrument cluster

▷

"ROAD": standard view of the instrument

cluster for comfort-oriented driving. All dis-

plays for driver assistance systems and col-

lision warning systems are enabled.

Display ranges on the instrument

cluster

The contents of the instrument cluster are

shown using the standard view as an example.

This view is displayed in the following driving

mode:

▷

"SPORT": M View to assist a sporty driv-

ing style. The displays for driver assistance

systems and collision warning systems are

reduced to a minimum.

"ROAD"

Additional information:

M MODE, refer to page 212.

138

Displays

CONTROLS

Operating elements on the steering

wheel

Operating

element

Function

Display the menu bar on the

instrument cluster.

Press the corresponding arrow

key to move the selection.

1

Speedometer

2

Driver assistance systems 222

Parking assistance systems 251

Digital speedometer 148

Shift lights 152

Turn knurled wheel: scroll se-

lection up or down.

3

4

5

6

Press knurled wheel: confirm

selection.

Driver Attention Camera 209

M Steptronic Sport transmission: gear dis-

play with Drivelogic 128

Settings

Specific displays can be configured individu-

ally, e.g., a second actual speed.

Gear shift indicator 150

Electric motor power gauge 150

Tachometer 150

7

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

8

9

Outside temperature 152

Electric range 151

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument cluster"

5. Select the desired setting.

10 State of charge indicator 151

11 Driving stability control systems 210

12 Central display range 153

Check Control 141

Live Vehicle

Selection lists 149

13 Speed Limit Info 222

Speed Limit Assistant 247

14 Fuel gauge 157

Principle

Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your

vehicle with different information, e.g., vehicle

status or current driving condition.

15 Range 151

16 Time 156

General information

Additional information:

Corresponding information is shown on the

control display depending on the driving situa-

tion. Fault statuses are not taken into account.

Adaptive content or various static content can

be selected.

Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 142.

139

Displays

CONTROLS

Caring for special components, refer to

page 397.

Adaptive content

The following content is displayed in alternat-

ing order and, if necessary, depending on the

selected drive mode:

Overview

▷

Vehicle status, refer to page 158.

Current driving condition, refer to page 158.

Sport displays, refer to page 158.

Trip data, refer to page 154.

xVIEW display, refer to page 217.

Adjusting the display

In the Live Vehicle menu, adaptive content or

various static content for the display can be

selected on the left-hand side bar:

Head-up display views are projected onto the

windshield through a protective glass. The pro-

tective glass is located between the steering

wheel and windshield.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Live Vehicle"

Displayable information

The following information is displayed on the

Head-up display depending on the driving

mode selected:

4. Select the desired setting.

BMW Head-up display

▷

Vehicle speed.

Navigation instructions.

Check Control messages.

Tachometer.

Principle

The Head-up display projects important infor-

mation, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the

driver's field of view. Information can be re-

corded without you having to look away from

the road.

Power gauge.

Selector lever display.

Lists and messages.

Driver assistance systems.

The steering wheel buttons can be used to

configure various views for the Head-up dis-

play. More settings can be configured on the

control display, e.g., brightness, height, or rota-

tion.

Some of this information is only displayed

briefly as needed.

Configuring a view

The views for the Head-up display can be set

independently of the display on the instrument

cluster, e.g., a reduced view.

General information

The views on the Head-up display adjust au-

tomatically depending on the selected driving

mode.

Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up

display in the Vehicle Care chapter.

1.

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Additional information:

140

Displays

CONTROLS

A menu bar is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Visibility of the display

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up

display is influenced by the following factors:

2. "HEAD-UP"

Select the menu using the arrow buttons on

the steering wheel where applicable.

▷

Seat position.

Objects on the Head-up display's protective

glass.

3. Select the desired setting using the knurled

wheel on the steering wheel.

▷

Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-

tective glass.

Turning the Head-up display on/off

▷

Windshield dirty on inside or outside.

Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.

Wet road.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Displays"

Unfavorable light conditions.

4. "Head-up display"

5. "Head-up display"

If the image is distorted, have the basic set-

tings checked by an authorized service center

or another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Settings

Various settings can be configured for the

Head-up display, e.g., height, brightness, or

rotation. In addition, individual displays in the

Head-up display can be set up separately such

as for Driver Assistance.

Special windshield

The windshield is part of the system.

The shape and coating of the special wind-

shield enable the system to function.

1.

Apps menu

If damaged, have the special windshield re-

placed by an authorized service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-up display"

5. Select the desired setting.

Check Control

Setting the view

Additional settings can be applied depending

on the driving mode selected and the Head-up

display configuration.

Principle

The Check Control system monitors functions

in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the

monitored systems.

1. "MENU"

A Check Control message is displayed as

a combination of indicator lights or warning

lights and text messages on the instrument

cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up dis-

play. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound

and a text message may appear on the control

display.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-up display"

5. Select the desired setting.

Some Check Control messages are hidden au-

tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they

will be stored. Stored Check Control messages

141

Displays

CONTROLS

can be displayed on the control display. Urgent

Check Control messages are permanently dis-

played but may be hidden temporarily.

Icons in the instrument cluster indicate

an active or saved Check Control mes-

sage.

Hiding Check Control messages

Permanently displayed Check Control mes-

sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-

sages are automatically displayed again after

approx. 8 seconds.

An arrow icon next to the Check Control

message indicates whether the Check Control

message can be hidden.

Indicator lights and warning

lights

To hide Check Control messages, press

the left arrow button on the steering

wheel.

Principle

The indicator lights and the warning lights on

the instrument cluster show the status of some

functions in the vehicle. The indicator lights

and warning lights indicate faults in monitored

systems.

Displaying stored Check Control

messages

Additional information such as the cause of a

fault or the required action can be called up via

Check Control.

Depending on the Check Control message, fur-

ther help can be selected.

General information

Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-

nate in a variety of combinations and colors.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Several of the lights are checked for proper

functioning and illuminate temporarily when

drive-ready state is turned on.

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Check Control"

5. Select the desired text message.

Red lights

Display

Seat belt reminder

A Check Control message is displayed in the

instrument cluster as a text message with an

icon.

Seat belt on the driver's seat is not

buckled.

Additional information:

For urgent messages, an added text is auto-

matically displayed on the control display.

Seat belt reminder, refer to page 105.

If several faults occur at once, the messages

are displayed consecutively.

Airbag system

Certain messages displayed while driving are

displayed again after drive-ready state is

switched off.

Warning light illuminates briefly: indi-

cates that the entire airbag system and

seat belt tensioners are operational

when drive-ready state is switched on.

142

Displays

CONTROLS

Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates

continuously: the airbag system or the seat

belt tensioners may not be operational. Have

the vehicle checked immediately by an author-

ized service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 177.

Pedestrian Warning

Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-

sion with a person, e.g., a pedestrian

or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re-

quired.

Additional information:

Airbags, refer to page 172.

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk

of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pe-

destrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate brak-

ing or an evasive maneuver.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

Additional information:

Parking brake, refer to page 131.

Warning function for pedestrians, refer to

page 182.

Brake system

The brake pads are worn or there is

another issue with the brake system.

Forward Collision Warning

Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-

sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.

Increased awareness is required.

The braking assistance may not be op-

erational. A higher pedal force may be

required for braking.

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk

of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.

Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-

neuver.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an

authorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Additional information:

System fault

Warning function in rear-end collision situa-

tions, refer to page 180.

Contact an authorized service center or

another qualified service center or re-

pair shop.

Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle

detected from the right

Emergency Stop Assistant

Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-

sion with vehicle crossing from the right

detected. Increased awareness is re-

quired.

The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-

gered.

Additional information:

Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 200.

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk

of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle

detected. Immediately initiate braking or an

evasive maneuver.

Risk of collision

Warning light illuminates or flashes in

conjunction with an acoustic signal if

there is risk of imminent collision.

Additional information:

143

Displays

CONTROLS

Warning function at intersections, refer to

page 184.

Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not

on steering wheel

Warning light illuminates and acoustic

signal sounds:

Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle

detected from the left

The hands are not on the steering

wheel or, depending on the vehicle equipment

and national-market version, the driver's line of

sight is not directed at the surrounding traffic.

System interruption is imminent.

Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-

sion with vehicle crossing from the left

detected. Increased awareness is re-

quired.

The system reduces the speed to a standstill if

applicable.

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk

of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle

detected. Immediately initiate braking or an

evasive maneuver.

It is possible that the system will not execute

any supporting steering movements.

Additional information:

Immediately grasp the steering wheel with

your hands and pay attention to the surround-

ing traffic.

Warning function at intersections, refer to

page 184.

Additional information:

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Distance Control

Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-

nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-

sary.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System

Additional information:

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

The system may not be operational.

The Antilock Braking System is not

available.

Assisted Driving Mode

The ability to steer may be restricted

during full braking.

Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-

nal sounds:

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an

authorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

The system is switched off or will be

interrupted very soon.

Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal

sounds:

Additional information:

Antilock Braking System, refer to page 210.

The driver's line of sight is not directed at the

surrounding traffic. System interruption is im-

minent. The system reduces the speed to a

standstill if applicable. It is possible that the

system will not execute any supporting steer-

ing movements.

Assisted Driving Mode

Warning light illuminates and acoustic

signal sounds: A system interruption is

imminent.

Additional information:

Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has

been crossed.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Additional information:

144

Displays

CONTROLS

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid

sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Additional information:

Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not

on steering wheel

Flat tire monitor, refer to page 362.

Hands are not grasping the steering

wheel. The system is still active.

Tire pressure monitor

Grab the steering wheel with your

hands.

Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or

tire pressure loss has been detected.

Follow the information in the Check

Control message.

Additional information:

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-

ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot

be detected.

Dynamic Stability Control

Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control is regulating the driving and

brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.

Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-

ing style to the road conditions.

▷

Fault caused by systems or devices with

the same radio frequency: after leaving the

area of the interference, the system auto-

matically becomes active again.

In the case of tires with special appro-

val: the tire pressure monitor was unable

to complete the reset. Reset the system

again.

Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability

Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.

Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.

If the warning light illuminates continuously,

have the vehicle checked immediately by an

authorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Wheel without wheel electronics installed:

Have it checked by an authorized service

center or another qualified service center or

repair shop as needed.

Additional information:

Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by

an authorized service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 215.

Additional information:

Dynamic Stability Control deactivated

Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 356.

The Dynamic Stability Control is deac-

tivated or the M Dynamic Mode is acti-

vated.

Steering system

Additional information:

The steering system may not be op-

erational.

▷

Dynamic Stability Control, refer to

page 215.

Have the vehicle checked by an author-

ized service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

▷

M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 216.

Additional information:

Flat tire monitor

Integral Active Steering, refer to page 221.

Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or

tire pressure loss has been detected.

145

Displays

CONTROLS

Exhaust emissions

M xDrive

▷

The warning light illuminates:

M xDrive is malfunctioning.

The exhaust gas quality is declining,

e.g., because the fuel filler cap is

fitted incorrectly. Have the vehicle

checked as soon as possible.

Have the vehicle checked immediately

by an authorized service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional information:

▷

The warning light flashes under certain cir-

cumstances:

M xDrive, refer to page 217.

This indicates that there is excessive misfir-

ing in the engine.

Green lights

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-

hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-

rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-

riod can seriously damage emission control

components, in particular the catalytic con-

verter.

Turn signal

Turn signal is on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator

light indicates that a turn signal bulb

has failed.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized

service center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

Additional information:

Turn signal, refer to page 160.

Additional information:

Parking lights

Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to

page 379.

Parking lights are switched on.

Additional information:

Parking lights, low-beam headlights,

refer to page 163.

Acoustic pedestrian protection

Acoustic pedestrian protection has

malfunctioned. Increased caution when

maneuvering.

Low-beam headlights

If malfunctioning repeatedly, have the vehicle

checked by an authorized service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Low-beam headlights are switched on.

Additional information:

Parking lights, low-beam headlights,

refer to page 163.

Additional information:

Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to

page 119.

Automatic High Beam Assistant

Low-beam headlights are switched on

and the Automatic High Beam Assis-

tant is activated.

Charging capacity limited

Additional information:

Charge vehicle, refer to page 328.

High-beam headlights are switched on and

off automatically depending on the traffic sit-

uation.

Additional information:

146

Displays

CONTROLS

Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to

page 161.

Additional information:

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

Lane departure warning

Speed Limit Assist

Depending on vehicle equipment and

national-market version:

The detected speed limit can be ap-

plied with the SET button. As soon as

the speed limit has been applied, a

green checkmark is displayed.

Indicator light flashes: the system ac-

tively issues a warning. If necessary, the sys-

tem performs a steering intervention.

Additional information:

Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 247.

Lane departure warning, refer to page 187.

Assisted Driving Mode

Automatic Hold is activated

The system supports the driver in

keeping the vehicle within the lane.

After stopping, Automatic Hold auto-

matically secures the vehicle to prevent

it from rolling away.

Additional information:

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Additional information:

Automatic Hold, refer to page 133.

Lane Change Assistant: lane change in

progress

Automatic Hold holding the vehicle

Arrow icon for lane change green: the

system carries out a lane change.

Automatic Hold secures the stopped

vehicle to prevent it from rolling away,

e.g., when stopped at a traffic light.

Additional information:

Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 239.

Additional information:

Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to

page 240.

Automatic Hold, refer to page 133.

Cruise Control

Lane Change Assistant: lane change

not possible

The system is active.

Additional information:

Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-

propriate side: system detected a lane

change request. Lane change not cur-

rently possible.

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

Distance Control

Additional information:

Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has

been detected ahead of you. The vehi-

cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been

detected ahead of you.

Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 239.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has

driven off.

The system is active.

Additional information:

147

Displays

CONTROLS

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 244.

Assisted Driving Mode

The system is on standby and does not

manipulate steering movements.

Blue lights

System activates automatically as soon

as all function conditions are fulfilled.

High-beam headlights

Additional information:

High-beam headlights have been

switched on.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Additional information:

▷

High-beam headlights, refer to page 160.

White lights

Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to

page 161.

Cruise Control with Distance Control

No Distance Control because accelera-

tor pedal is being pressed.

Gray lights

Additional information:

Seat belt reminder

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-

other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

Additional information:

The system can be used.

Additional information:

Seat belts, refer to page 104.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to

page 244.

Cruise Control

The system is interrupted.

Additional information:

Digital tachometer

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

General information

Distance Control

The digital speedometer is permanently dis-

played in all driving modes. The speed cur-

rently driven is displayed.

Indicator light is illuminated: the system

is interrupted.

Indicator light flashes: Conditions are

not adequate for the system to work. The sys-

tem was deactivated but applies the brakes

until you actively resume control by pressing

on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Adjusting the unit

Depending on the national-market version, it

may be possible to set the unit for the digital

tachometer.

Additional information:

1.

Apps menu

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

2. "All apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Units"

148

Displays

CONTROLS

5. "Distance"

Display

6. Select the desired setting.

Selection lists

Principle

Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used

for certain functions in the instrument cluster or

the Head-up display.

Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are

displayed on the instrument cluster.

▷

Entertainment source.

Current audio source.

List of most recent telephone calls.

Example: selecting a radio station

If necessary, the corresponding menu will open

on the control display.

1.

Press the entertainment sources

Displaying and using the list

button.

The selection lists can be displayed and op-

erated using the operating elements on the

steering wheel.

2.

To switch to the list of radio sta-

tions, tilt the knurled wheel to the right.

Operating

elements

Function

3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio

station.

4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-

lected radio station.

Turn the knurled wheel: dis-

play the entertainment list or

scroll up or down in the list.

Example: changing the entertainment

source

Press knurled wheel: confirm

selection.

Press the corresponding arrow

key to change the entertain-

ment source.

1.

Press the entertainment sources

button.

Show list of most recent tele-

phone calls.

2.

To select an entertainment source,

turn the knurled wheel.

3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-

lected entertainment source.

149

Displays

CONTROLS

The electric driving range is variable and may

change depending on the driving situation.

Gear shift indicator

Principle

Reduced drive power

The available power may be reduced due to

certain factors. The power gauge is automati-

cally adjusted accordingly.

The shift point indicator recommends the gear

that best suits the current driving situation. Us-

ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-

ing style.

In addition, the icons in the power gauge indi-

cate a reduced drive power.

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the shift indicator activates in

sequential mode.

Icon

Description

Blue icon: cold drivetrain.

White icon: increased drive sys-

tem temperature, for instance

due to sustained or high

Display

power demand when driving

on mountain roads.

Icon

Description

Shift up to the most fuel efficient

gear.

System-related functional limi-

tation.

A Check Control message is

displayed in addition where ap-

plicable.

Power gauge for electric

motor

Tachometer

Principle

The power gauge indicates the current electric

drive power as a percentage.

General information

The engine has a permissible rotational speed

range. Excessive speeds are indicated by a

yellow prewarning field and a red warning field.

The permissible speed increases as the engine

oil temperature increases.

Display

Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In

this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect

the engine.

Display

The tachometer is displayed depending on the

operating mode selected.

Arrow 1: display for energy recovery, e.g., dur-

ing deceleration.

The tachometer display changes depending

on the selected driving mode.

Arrow 2: range for electric driving.

150

Displays

CONTROLS

Reduced rotational speed range

General information

Various factors are taken into account when

calculating the electric range. The electric

range value is adapted dynamically.

The available rotational speed range may be

reduced due certain factors such as a cold

drive system. The tachometer display is auto-

matically adjusted depending on the available

rotational speed range.

The following factors, for example, are taken

into account when calculating the range:

Icon Description

▷

Automatic climate control settings.

Driving style.

Power is reduced while the vehicle is

broken in.

Climate conditions.

Vehicle load.

The total range is the electric range together

with the combustion engine range.

Standby state and drive-

ready state

Additional information:

Fuel gauge and total range, refer to page 157.

OFF is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster. Drive-ready state

is turned off and standby state

turned on.

Safety information

Warning

Even when it is indicated that the high-volt-

age battery is discharged, the high-voltage

system is always still under high voltage.

There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do

not touch or change live parts, e.g., orange

high-voltage cables, even when the batteries

are discharged.

When the drive-ready state

is switched on, READY is dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

If necessary, the combustion en-

gine starts automatically.

Additional information:

▷

Operating state of the vehicle, refer to

page 44.

Display

▷

Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 120.

The display indicates that the

high-voltage battery is almost

fully discharged or the electric

drive is currently not available.

Charge state indicator and

electric range

If this icon is displayed, the

electric drive is not available be-

cause the high-voltage battery is

too cold or too warm. A Check

Control message is displayed

where applicable.

Principle

The charge state indicator provides informa-

tion about the battery charge and electric

range on the instrument cluster.

151

Displays

CONTROLS

The function is not available for the first 10 sec-

onds after locking.

Outside temperature

Additional information:

General information

If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a

signal sounds.

Charge vehicle, refer to page 328.

Overview

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

When the vehicle is stationary or at low speed,

the temperature displayed may differ slightly

from the actual outside temperature due to ex-

ternal environmental influences.

Safety information

Warning

1

Current state of charge 336

Current range 336

Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃

there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on

bridges or shady sections of the road. There

is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-

age. Modify your driving style to the weather

conditions at low temperatures.

2

3

4

Current charging capacity 336

Range when reaching the charging desti-

nation 336

5

6

7

Set departure time 337

Departure air conditioning 337

Charge target set 336

Charging screen

8

Set or maximum current limit 328

Principle

Shift lights

The charging screen displays information

about the charging process in the instrument

cluster.

Principle

Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at

which optimal acceleration can be achieved.

General information

Some of the displays in the instrument cluster

may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's

Manual.

General information

Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate

the upcoming shift point.

When the vehicle is locked, the most important

information is displayed for a short period of

time.

Shift when all fields illuminate red at the latest.

When the maximum rotational speed is

reached, the entire display flashes and the fuel

supply is interrupted in order to protect the en-

gine.

Display charging screen again:

With the charging cable plugged in,

press the button on the vehicle key.

152

Displays

CONTROLS

▷

Reduced display.

Functional requirement

Sequential mode must be selected to display

the shift lights.

Trip data, refer to page 154.

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

Navigation system route preview.

Navigation system map view.

M Setup, refer to page 210.

Shift lights in the instrument cluster

Information on the systems configured us-

ing the SETUP button.

▷

Drive data.

Tire data.

Information on wheels and tires can be dis-

played.

▷

Sport displays, refer to page 158.

G-Meter, refer to page 156.

Entertainment.

The Shift lights are shown on the instrument

cluster in the following situations:

The Head-up display is deactivated or the fol-

lowing drive mode is activated: "ROAD".

Augmented View.

Depending on vehicle equipment, Aug-

mented View on the instrument cluster en-

ables the visualization of driver assistance

systems on the actual vehicle's surround-

ings.

Shift lights in the Head-up display

Grey lines indicate the recommended min-

imum distance to the preceding vehicle

when speed control systems are deacti-

vated.

▷

Android Auto©.

Depending on vehicle equipment and na-

tional-market version, select functions of

a compatible smartphone can also be dis-

played, e.g., map views.

The shift lights, arrow 1, are displayed above

the tachometer, arrow 2.

The Shift lights are shown on the Head-up dis-

play in the following drive mode:

Some contents for the central display range

can also be configured as a view in the Head-

up display.

"SPORT"

Additional information:

Head-up display, refer to page 140.

Central display range

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-

ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.

Displayable content

The following settings are available depending

on the driving mode selected:

153

Displays

CONTROLS

▷

Average electrical consumption de-

pending on the configured interval.

Configuring the central display

range

The content of the central display range on the

instrument cluster can be configured individu-

ally, for instance the trip data display.

Travel time depending on the config-

ured interval.

Distance traveled depending on the

configured interval.

Odometer for driving without a com-

bustion engine.

1.

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

A menu bar is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Displaying trip data continuously

1.

Apps menu

2. "CONTENT"

2. "Vehicle"

Select the menu using the arrow buttons on

the steering wheel where applicable.

3. "Live Vehicle"

4. "Content"

5. "Trip data"

3. Select the desired setting using the knurled

wheel on the steering wheel.

Display in the instrument cluster

Information on consumption and distance cov-

ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-

ter.

Trip data

Principle

The trip data display provides various informa-

tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption

or trip distance.

General information

The trip data can be displayed on the control

display and in the instrument cluster.

Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle

menu, the trip data is shown on the control

display.

▷

Current consumption, electric, arrow 1.

Current consumption, fuel, arrow 2.

Average consumption, fuel, arrow 3.

Average consumption, electric, arrow 4.

The values can be displayed and reset de-

pending on different intervals.

Display on the control display

Distance traveled depending on the interval

set, arrow 5.

General information

The following trip data is shown on the control

display:

▷

Total distance, arrow 6.

Current consumption

The current consumption display allows you

to check the current energy consumption and

▷

Configured interval for displaying trip data.

Average fuel consumption depending

on the configured interval.

154

Displays

CONTROLS

the current fuel consumption, e.g., to drive effi-

ciently.

The trip data is displayed.

Average consumption

The average power consumption and the

average fuel consumption are displayed de-

pending on how the intervals for displaying trip

data are configured.

Adjusting the display of the trip data

The intervals for the display of the trip data

in the instrument cluster and on the control

display are adjustable.

2. Press and hold the button until the values

are reset.

Via iDrive:

1.

Apps menu

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Time period for trip data"

5. "Values"

3. "System settings"

4. "Time period for trip data"

5. "Reset Individual"

6. Select the desired setting:

The average values and counters are reset.

Once the average values and counters have

been reset, the following interval is automati-

cally activated:

▷

"Since start of trip": the values are auto-

matically reset approx. four hours after

the vehicle has come to a standstill.

▷

"Since last refuel": the values are au-

tomatically reset after refueling with a

larger quantity of fuel.

"Since Individual ( )"

Assisted View

▷

"Since last charge": the values are auto-

matically reset after charging.

Principle

"Since factory": the values since the

time of the factory delivery are dis-

played.

With Assisted View, information on driver as-

sistance systems can be displayed on the in-

strument cluster with a vehicle animation.

▷

"Since Individual": the values since the

last manual reset are displayed. The

values can be reset at any time.

Assisted View is available in the following driv-

ing mode:

"ROAD"

Resetting average values manually

If the parking assistance system is on, parking

and maneuvering information is shown in As-

sisted View for all driving modes.

The following interval can be reset manually at

any time:

"Since Individual ( )"

Using the button on the left steering column

switch:

1. Press the button.

155

Displays

CONTROLS

Additional information:

Safety information

▷

Cameras, refer to page 39.

Radar sensors, refer to page 40.

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

G-Meter

General information

The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-

plied in longitudinal and transverse direction

on the vehicle occupants while driving.

The display can be configured on the central

display range of the instrument cluster.

The values are automatically reset whenever

you start a new drive.

General

Additional information:

You can configure how Assisted View is dis-

played on the central display range.

Central display area, refer to page 153

Additional information:

Manually reseting G-Meter values

1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument

cluster.

Central display area, refer to page 153

Display

2.

Press and hold the knurled wheel

on the steering wheel until the values are

reset.

Date and time

Various settings can be applied for the date

and time display such as the date format.

An example with active Driver Assistance: the

indicator and warning lights for the distance

control and the Lane Change Assistant indi-

cate a lane change to the next lane. At the

same time, the lane change to the next lane is

shown with animation in the Assisted View.

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the time zone can be set or

automatic time zone enabled. With automatic

time setting, the time, date and, if necessary,

the time zone are updated automatically.

1.

Apps menu

System limits

The system's detection capability is limited.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Date and time"

5. Select the desired settings.

Only objects that are detected by the system

are taken into account.

156

Displays

CONTROLS

Indicator light in the instrument

cluster

Fuel gauge and total range

The yellow indicator light illuminates,

once the fuel reserve is reached.

Principle

The fuel gauge shows information on the cur-

rent fuel tank fill level and the total range on

the instrument cluster.

Overall range

The total range considers the contents of the

fuel tank as well as the electric energy in the

high-voltage battery. If the prerequisites for

electric driving are not met, the total range

considers the content of the fuel tank only.

General information

Vehicle inclination may cause the display to

vary.

Additional information:

Refueling, refer to page 340.

With a low remaining range, a Check Control

message is briefly displayed. A low remaining

range means that engine functions cannot al-

ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when

cornering at speed.

Safety information

NOTICE

The Check Control message appears

continuously below a range of approx.

30 miles/50 km.

With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the

engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.

Engine functions are not ensured anymore.

There is a risk of property damage. Refuel

promptly.

Additional information:

Battery charge indicator and electric range, re-

fer to page 151

Display

Setting the units of

measurement

Depending on the national-market version, you

can set the units of measurement for some

values, for instance consumption, distances,

and temperature.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Current total range, arrow 1.

3. "System settings"

4. "Units"

Current fill level of fuel tank, arrow 2.

Arrow icon for the vehicle side on which the

fuel filler flap is located, arrow 3.

5. Select the desired setting.

157

Displays

CONTROLS

The following states can be displayed:

Vehicle status

▷

Driving.

Electric driving.

General information

The status can be displayed and actions per-

formed for several systems such as for Check

Control.

Additional information on electric driving is

displayed depending on the situation.

▷

"CHARGING BATTERY"

Functional requirements

Displaying vehicle status

▷

The following driving mode is selected:

1.

Apps menu

"ROAD"

2. "Vehicle"

▷

For Live Vehicle, select the following set-

ting: "Adaptive content".

3. "Vehicle status"

Overview

Display

Icon

Description

"Battery temperature": Tem-

perature of high-voltage bat-

tery, refer to page 328.

"FLAT TIRE MONITOR": Sta-

tus of the flat tire monitor, refer

to page 362.

"Tire Pressure Monitor": status

of the Tire Pressure Monitor,

refer to page 356.

An example:

The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-

cle decelerates.

"Engine oil level": electronic

oil measurement, refer to

page 373.

Sport displays

"Check Control": displaying

stored Check Control mes-

sages, refer to page 141.

Principle

The Sport displays especially support a sporty

driving style.

"Service": display of the service

notifications, refer to page 159.

Functional requirements

Current driving condition

▷

SPORT driving mode is selected.

▷

The following setting is selected for Live

Vehicle:"Adaptive content"

General information

The current driving condition is displayed dy-

namically while driving in the Live Vehicle

menu on the control display.

158

Displays

CONTROLS

Maintenance measures as well as legally

mandated inspections are displayed.

Indicators on control display

The sport displays are displayed in the Live

Vehicle menu on the control display.

5. Select the desired entry.

The following information is displayed:

Entering appointment dates

Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can

be entered.

▷

Torque.

Power.

Boost pressure.

Engine oil temperature.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are

set correctly.

1.

Apps menu

Display in the instrument cluster

Sport displays can be shown in the central dis-

play area of the instrument cluster. Sport dis-

plays include information on power and torque.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Service"

Additional information:

5. "Vehicle inspection"

6. "Date:"

Central display area, refer to page 153

7. Select the desired setting.

Service

Principle

The service notifications indicate recom-

mended maintenance work.

General information

After turning on, the next service appointment

or the distance remaining until the next servic-

ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-

ter.

A service advisor can read out the mainte-

nance work from the vehicle key.

Display

More information may be displayed on the

control display.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Service"

159

Light and view

CONTROLS

Light and view

4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

5. "One-touch turn signal"

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

6. Select the desired setting.

Brief flashing

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold

it there for as long as you want the turn signal

to flash.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

High-beam headlights,

headlight flasher

Turn signal

Turn signal in exterior mirror

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

When driving and during operation of the turn

signals or hazard warning system, do not fold

in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal

lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.

Flashing

▷

High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.

The high-beam headlights illuminate when

the low-beam headlights are switched on.

High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,

arrow 2.

Press the lever past the resistance point.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster illuminates when the high-beam

headlights are turned on.

One-touch signaling

Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-

justed.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Exterior lighting"

160

Light and view

CONTROLS

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the low-

beam headlights are switched on.

Automatic High Beam

Assistant

The headlights are automatically changed be-

tween low-beam headlights and high-beam

headlights.

Principle

The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects

other road users early on and automatically

switches the high-beam headlights on or off

depending on the traffic situation.

The blue indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster illuminates when the sys-

tem switches on the high-beam head-

lights.

General information

Interruption of the journey with activated Au-

tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic

High Beam Assistant remains activated when

continuing the journey.

The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures

that the high-beam headlights are switched

on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the

low speed range, the high-beam headlights

are not switched on by the system.

The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-

vated when manually switching the high-beam

headlights on and off.

The system responds to light from oncoming

traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to

ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-

ies.

To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-

tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

The high-beam headlights can be switched on

and off manually at any time.

Deactivating Automatic High Beam

Assistant

Functional requirements

▷

Automatic headlight control is activated.

▷

Low-beam headlights are switched on.

Activating Automatic High Beam

Assistant

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Sensitivity of the Automatic High

Beam Assistant

General information

The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam

Assistant can be adjusted.

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

161

Light and view

CONTROLS

▷

In very unfavorable weather conditions

such as fog or heavy precipitation.

Safety information

When detecting poorly-lit road users such

as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders

and wagons; when driving close to train or

ship traffic; or at animal crossings.

Warning

If adjustments have been made or the sen-

sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic

may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk

of accident, injury, and property damage. If

adjustments have been made and the sen-

sitivity has been modified, make sure that

oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.

Switch off the high-beam headlights man-

ually if required.

▷

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,

in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-

ing traffic on highways.

▷

In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-

ence of highly reflective signs.

When the windshield in the area in front

of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or

covered with stickers, etc.

Functional requirements

▷

Setting at standstill only.

Drive-ready state is switched on.

Light is turned off.

Exterior lighting

Overview

Increasing sensitivity

Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-

proximately 10 seconds.

Buttons in the vehicle

A Check Control message is displayed. The

system responds more sensitively.

Resetting the sensitivity

Push the turn signal lever to the front again

for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-

ready state.

The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam

Assistant is reset to the factory settings.

Icon

Function

Exterior lighting menu.

System limits

The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot

replace the driver's personal judgment of when

to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-

priate, dim the high beams manually.

Automatic headlight control.

Low-beam headlights.

Exterior lighting off.

The system may not be fully operational in

the following situations, and driver intervention

may be necessary:

Exterior lighting off.

162

Light and view

CONTROLS

If the low-beam headlights are switched on

manually, the automatic headlight control is

deactivated.

Functions via iDrive

Icon

Function

Automatic headlight control.

Activate automatic headlight control

Press the button on the light switch.

Low-beam headlights.

Parking lights.

The LED in the button illuminates.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the low-

beam headlights are switched on.

Exterior lighting off.

System limits

The automatic headlight control cannot re-

place your personal judgment of lighting condi-

tions.

Left roadside parking light.

Right roadside parking light.

For example, the sensors are unable to detect

fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn

the lights on manually.

Buttons on the vehicle key

Parking lights, low-beam

headlights and roadside

parking lights

Icon

Function

Interior lighting.

Parts of the exterior lighting.

General information

Pathway lighting.

If the driver's door is opened when the drive-

ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting

is automatically switched off after a period of

time.

Driving lights automatic

Parking lights

Principle

General information

The parking lights can only be turned on at low

speeds.

The low-beam headlights are switched on and

off automatically depending on the ambient

brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight

or if there is precipitation.

Turning on parking lights

General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can

cause the lights to be turned on.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

163

Light and view

CONTROLS

3. "Exterior lighting"

4. "Parking light"

Turning off low-beam headlights

Depending on the national-market version, the

low-beam headlights can be turned off in the

low speed range:

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster illuminates.

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

▷

Press the button on the light switch.

Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-

riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle

battery and it would then be impossible to

switch on drive-ready state.

▷

Press and hold the button on the

light switch.

Turn off light via iDrive.

Turning off parking lights

The following options are available to turn off

the parking lights:

Roadside parking lights

When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-

side parking light can be switched on.

▷

Press the button on the light switch.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Exterior lighting"

Press and hold the button on the

light switch.

4. "Left roadside parking light" or "Right

roadside parking light"

▷

Turn off light via iDrive.

Turn on drive-ready state.

After the drive-ready state is switched on,

the automatic headlight control will be acti-

vated.

Welcome lights

Principle

The welcome light turns on automatically for

a limited period of time when approaching or

unlocking the vehicle.

Low-beam headlights

Turning on low-beam headlights

Press the button on the light switch.

General information

Depending on the equipment, the exterior

lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.

The low-beam headlights illuminate when

drive-ready state is switched on.

Activating/deactivating welcome

light

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster illuminates.

1.

Apps menu

Press the button again to switch on the low-

beam headlights when the standby state is

switched on.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Exterior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

5. Depending on the equipment, select the

following setting:

164

Light and view

CONTROLS

▷

"Welcome and goodbye"

4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

5. "Pathway lighting"

When unlocking the vehicle, individual

lighting functions are turned on.

6. Select the desired setting.

"BMW Iconic Glow"

The radiator grille lighting can only be

adjusted when the vehicle is stationary

and the drive-ready state is switched

off.

Daytime driving lights

General information

The daytime driving lights illuminate when

drive-ready state is switched on.

Turning on the welcome light

▷

Automatically on approach.

Activating/deactivating daytime

driving lights

▷

During unlocking.

In some countries, daytime driving lights are

mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-

vate the daytime driving lights in front.

▷

Press the button on the vehicle key

with the vehicle locked.

Depending on the settings, the interior

lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will

be turned on.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

The function is not available for the first

10 seconds after locking.

3. "Exterior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-

tional-market version:

Pathway lighting

▷

"Daytime driving lights"

"Rear daytime driving lights"

"BMW Iconic Glow"

Principle

For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting

turns on for a certain period of time after leav-

ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area

surrounding the vehicle.

Adaptive lighting functions

Switching pathway lighting on

Principle

▷

After switching off the drive-ready state,

briefly push the turn signal lever forward.

Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-

lumination of the road.

▷

Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Setting the duration

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Exterior lighting"

165

Light and view

CONTROLS

General information

The adaptive lighting functions may consist of

one system or multiple systems, depending on

the equipment version:

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement

The brightness can only be adjusted in dark-

ness and with turned on parking lights or low-

beam headlights.

▷

Cornering light.

Activating the adaptive lighting

functions

Setting the brightness

Press the button on the light switch.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Interior lighting"

The LED in the button illuminates.

4. "Cockpit brightness at night"

5. Select the desired setting.

The adaptive lighting functions are active

when the drive-ready state is switched on.

Interior lighting

Cornering light

General information

Principle

Depending on the equipment version, interior

lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient

lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically

controlled.

In tight curves, for instance on mountainous

roads or when turning, an additional cornering

light is switched on that illuminates the inside

of the curve when the vehicle is moving below

a certain speed.

Overview

General information

The cornering light is automatically switched

on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,

where applicable, the use of turn signals.

When driving in reverse, the cornering lights

may be automatically switched on regardless

of the steering-wheel angle.

Adaptive headlight range

control

Reading lights

Interior lights

The adaptive headlight range control feature

balances out acceleration and braking proc-

esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in

order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.

Turning interior lights on/off

Using the button:

166

Light and view

CONTROLS

Press the button.

Activating/deactivating ambient

light

1.

Apps menu

To switch off permanently: press the button

and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

2. "Vehicle"

The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle

can be switched on and off independently. The

button is located in the rear headliner.

3. "Interior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Ambient lighting"

Via iDrive:

Turning ambient light on/off

1.

Apps menu

The ambient light is switched on when the ve-

hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the

vehicle is locked.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Interior lighting"

4. "Reading light"

If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,

it will not be turned on when the vehicle is

unlocked.

5.

Tap on the icon.

Turning reading lights on/off

Using the button:

Selecting the color

1.

Apps menu

Press the button.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Interior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Color"

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-

ing lights are located next to the interior lights

in the front and rear.

Via iDrive:

6. Select the desired setting.

1.

Apps menu

Setting the brightness

2. "Vehicle"

1.

Apps menu

3. "Interior lighting"

4. "Reading light"

5. Tap the desired seat.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Interior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Brightness"

Ambient light

6. Select the desired setting.

General information

Depending on the equipment version, lighting

can be adjusted for some lights in the car's

interior.

Dynamic light

Certain situations, for example incoming calls

or obstacles detected when opening doors, are

indicated by light effects. If the ambient light is

disabled, the light effects are still displayed.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

167

Light and view

CONTROLS

3. "Interior lighting"

NOTICE

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Lighting effects"

The wiper blades can wear out or become

damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry

window for a longer period of time. The wiper

motor can overheat. There is a risk of prop-

erty damage. Do not use the wipers when the

window is dry.

6. Select the desired setting.

Reduced for night drive

Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced

when the vehicle is driven in the dark.

1.

Apps menu

NOTICE

2. "Vehicle"

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching on.

There is a risk of property damage. Defrost

the windshield prior to switching the wipers

on.

3. "Interior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Reduced for night driving"

Speaker lighting

Turning on window wiper system

Principle

Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.

Turning speaker lighting on/off

The speaker lighting is switched on when the

vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the

vehicle is locked.

Window wiper system

Safety information

Warning

Press the lever up until the desired position is

reached.

▷

Rest position of the wipers, position 0.

Rain sensor mode, position 1.

Normal wiper speed, position 2.

Fast wiper speed, position 3.

If the wipers start moving in the folded away

state, body parts can be jammed or damage

may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is

a risk of injury and risk of property damage.

Make sure that the vehicle is switched off

when the wipers are in the folded-away state

and the wipers are folded in when switching

on.

When the journey is interrupted with the win-

dow wiper system turned on: when the journey

continues, the wipers resume at their previous

speed.

168

Light and view

CONTROLS

Activating rain sensor

Turning off the window wiper

system and flick wipe

Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-

row 1.

Press the lever down.

Wiping operation is started.

▷

Turning off: press the lever down until it

reaches the 0 position.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

▷

Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0

position.

In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not

start.

The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-

sition when released.

Deactivating rain sensor

Press lever back into the 0 position.

Rain sensor

Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity

Principle

The rain sensor automatically controls the

wiper operation depending on the intensity of

the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, di-

rectly in front of the interior mirror.

Safety information

Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity

of the rain sensor.

▷

Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.

Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers

can accidentally start moving in car washes.

There is a risk of property damage. Deacti-

vate the rain sensor in car washes.

169

Light and view

CONTROLS

Window washer system

Rear wiper

Safety information

Switching on the rear wiper

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window

at low temperatures and obstruct the view.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Only use the window washer

system when the washer fluid will not freeze.

Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.

Turn the outer switch upward.

▷

Resting position of wiper, position 0.

NOTICE

Intermittent operation, arrow 1. When re-

verse gear is engaged, the system switches

to continuous operation.

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,

the washer pump cannot work as intended.

There is a risk of property damage. Do not

use the washer system when the washer

fluid reservoir is empty.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

Cleaning the windshield

▷

In rest position: Turn the switch downward,

arrow 3. The switch returns to its rest posi-

tion when released.

▷

In intermittent operation: turn the switch

further, arrow 2. The switch automatically

returns to its interval position when re-

leased.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid

reservoir fill level is low.

Fold-out position of the wipers

Pull the lever.

The washer fluid is sprayed on the windshield,

and the wipers are turned on briefly.

Principle

In the fold-out position, the wipers can be

folded out from the windshield, which is impor-

tant, for instance, when changing the wiper

blades or for folding away under frosty condi-

tions.

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automati-

cally heated while standby state is switched

on.

170

Light and view

CONTROLS

Safety information

Folding out the wipers

1. Turn on standby state.

2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until

the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away

state, body parts can be jammed or damage

may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is

a risk of injury and risk of property damage.

Make sure that the vehicle is switched off

when the wipers are in the folded-away state

and the wipers are folded in when switching

on.

NOTICE

3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the

windshield.

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching on.

There is a risk of property damage. Defrost

the windshield prior to switching the wipers

on.

Folding in the wipers

1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.

2. Switch on standby state and press and

hold the wiper lever down again.

Wipers return to their rest position and are

ready again for operation.

171

Safety

CONTROLS

Safety

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Vehicle features and options

Additional information:

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Airbags

1

Front airbag, driver

Front airbag, front passenger

Head airbag

4

5

Side airbag

Knee airbag

2

3

Front airbags

Side airbag

In the event of a side collision, the side airbag

protects the side of the body in the chest and

lap area.

The front airbag helps protect the driver and

front passenger in the event of a frontal impact

in which the seat belts alone would not provide

adequate protection.

Head airbag

In the event of a side collision, the head airbag

protects the head.

172

Safety

CONTROLS

shoulder rests against the backrest when

crossing the hands and the upper body

is as far back as possible while still main-

taining a comfortable grip on the steering

wheel.

Ejection Mitigation

The head airbag system is designed as an

ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce

the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants

through side windows during rollovers or side

collision events.

▷

Make sure that the front passenger is sit-

ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in

the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.

Knee airbag

The availability of the knee airbag depends on

the national-market version.

▷

Make sure that occupants keep their heads

away from the side airbag.

There should be no additional persons, an-

imals or objects between an airbag and a

person.

The knee airbag protects the legs in the event

of a frontal impact.

▷

Dashboard and windshield on the pas-

senger's side must stay clear - do not at-

tach adhesive film or coverings and do not

attach brackets or cables, for instance for

navigation devices or mobile phones.

Protective effect

General information

Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-

uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.

Do not bond the airbag cover panels with

adhesive, do not cover them or modify

them in any way.

Information on optimum protective

effect of the airbags

▷

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on

the passenger's side as a storage area.

Warning

Keep storage compartments near the air-

bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or

center armrest.

If the seat position is incorrect, the seat

belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-

ment area of the airbags is impaired, the

airbag system cannot provide protection as

intended and may cause additional injuries

due to deployment. There is a risk of injury

or danger to life. Follow the information on

achieving the optimum protective effect of the

airbag system.

▷

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,

or other objects on the front seats unless

they are specifically designed for seats with

integrated airbags.

▷

Do not hang pieces of clothing such as

jackets over the backrests.

Do not modify individual components or

wiring. This also applies to steering wheel

covers, the dashboard, and the seats.

▷

Keep a distance from the airbags.

Fasten the seat belts correctly.

▷

Do not disassemble the airbag system.

Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the

3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the

risk of injury to your hands or arms as low

as possible when the airbag is deployed.

Even when you follow all instructions very

closely, injury from contact with the airbags

cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead

to short-term and, in most cases, temporary

hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

▷

Adjust seat and steering wheel so that

hands can be crossed over the steering

wheel. Select the settings so that the

173

Safety

CONTROLS

Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-

ities may affect the air bag system; contact

BMW Customer Relations for further informa-

tion.

Malfunction

▷

Warning light does not illuminate

when drive-ready state is turned on.

▷

The warning light illuminates con-

tinuously.

Warnings and information on the airbags are

also found on the sun visors.

The airbag system or the seat belt tension-

ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle

checked immediately by an authorized service

center or another qualified service center or

repair shop.

Operational readiness of the airbag

system

Safety information

Setting the front seat positions

The power that deploys the driver's/front

passenger airbags depends on the position of

the driver's/front passenger seat.

Warning

Individual components can be hot after de-

ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk

of injury. Do not touch individual components.

To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-

brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-

spective message appears on the control dis-

play.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to failure,

malfunction or unintentional deployment of

the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-

tion, the airbag system might not deploy as

intended despite the accident severity. There

is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the

airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-

bled, and scrapped by an authorized service

center or another qualified service center or

repair shop.

Additional information:

Seats, refer to page 100.

Automatic deactivation of

front passenger airbag

Principle

The system reads if the front passenger seat

is occupied by measuring the human body's

resistance.

Display in the instrument cluster

The front passenger airbag is activated or de-

activated.

When drive-ready state is turned on,

the warning light in the instrument

cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-

cating the operational readiness of the entire

airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.

General information

Before transporting a child on the front pass-

enger seat, refer to the safety information and

instructions for children on the front passenger

seat, see Children.

174

Safety

CONTROLS

front passenger's side is not

activated.

Safety information

▷

The indicator light does not illuminate

when, for instance, a correctly seated per-

son of sufficient size is detected on the

seat. The airbag on the front passenger's

side is activated.

Warning

To ensure the front passenger airbag func-

tion, the system must be able to detect

whether a person is sitting in the front pass-

enger seat. The entire seat surface must be

used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury

or danger to life. Make sure that the front

passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-

well.

Fault of the automatic deactivation

system

For adolescents and adults, the front pass-

enger airbag may deactivate in certain seat

positions. In this case, the indicator light for

the front passenger airbag illuminates in the

headliner.

Functional requirements

To enable accurate recognition of the occupied

seat surface:

In this case, change the seat position so that

the front passenger airbag activates and the

indicator light goes out.

▷

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats

or other items to the front passenger seat

unless they are specifically determined to

be safe for use on the front passenger seat.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have

the person sit in the rear seat.

▷

Do not place objects under the seat that

can press against the seat from below.

Detected child restraint systems

Do not place any electronic devices on the

front passenger seat if a child restraint sys-

tem is to be installed on it.

The system generally detects children seated

in a child restraint system, particularly in child

restraint systems required by NHTSA at the

point in time when the vehicle was manufac-

tured. After installing a child restraint system,

make sure that the indicator light for the front

passenger airbag illuminates. This indicates

that the child restraint system has been de-

tected and the front passenger airbag is not

activated.

▷

No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light, front passenger

airbag

The front passenger airbag indicator light in

the headliner indicates the operating state of

the front passenger airbag.

The light indicates whether the airbag is acti-

vated or deactivated.

Collision warning systems

After drive-ready state is switched on, the light

illuminates briefly and then indicates whether

the airbag is activated or deactivated.

General information

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has

different systems that can help prevent the risk

of imminent collision.

▷

The indicator light illuminates

when a child is properly

seated in a child restraint

system or when the seat is

empty. The airbag on the

▷

Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-

tervention, refer to page 177.

▷

Exit warning, refer to page 186.

175

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

Lane departure warning, refer to page 187.

Sensors

Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to

page 191.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-

gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-

lowing sensors:

▷

Side collision mitigation, refer to page 194.

▷

Camera behind the windshield.

Front radar sensor.

Rear-end collision preparation, refer to

page 195.

▷

Traffic Light And Sign Warning, refer to

page 196.

Radar sensors, side, front.

Radar sensors, side, rear.

▷

Wrong way warning, refer to page 198.

Additional information:

No Turn on Red function, refer to page 199.

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to

page 200.

Turning on/turning off collision

warning systems

Depending on national-market version, some

of the systems are automatically activated

whenever you start driving.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

The following functions are adjustable.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. Select the desired settings.

M MODE: the various driving modes affect the

availability of the collision warning systems.

Some collision warning systems are deacti-

vated depending on the driving mode selected.

Warning

Additional information:

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.

Due to its limits, the system may not issue

warnings or responses, or these may be is-

sued late or in a manner that is not consis-

tent with their normal use. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate

M Mode, refer to page 212

Resetting the settings

The settings of the collision warning systems

can be reset to the default settings at vehicle

outbound delivery.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

176

Safety

CONTROLS

5. "Safety and warnings"

The system can issue a warning of a possible

risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-

pendently, if needed.

6. "Reset to recommended settings"

System limits

General information

Depending on the equipment version, the For-

ward Collision Mitigation system includes the

following functions:

Safety information

Warning

▷

Warning function in rear-end collision situa-

tions, refer to page 180.

Because of system limitations, this system

may either not respond, or respond too late,

incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk

of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-

formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding

the scope of the system’s operation and limi-

tations.

Warning function for oncoming traffic, refer

to page 181.

Warning function for turning with oncoming

traffic, refer to page 182.

Warning function for pedestrians, refer to

page 182.

Warning function at intersections, refer to

page 184.

Detection capability

The system's detection capability is limited.

Evasion Assistant, refer to page 185.

The system only takes into account objects

that are located in the detection range of the

installed sensors and are detected by the sys-

tem.

Safety information

Warning

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area

is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Thus, a system response might not come or

might come late.

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

Forward Collision Mitigation

with brake intervention

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.

Due to its limits, the system may not issue

warnings or responses, or these may be is-

sued late or in a manner that is not consis-

tent with their normal use. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust

Principle

The Forward Collision Mitigation can help

prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be

avoided, the system can help reduce the se-

verity of the accident.

177

Safety

CONTROLS

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate

Turning system off manually

Depending on national-market version, the ad-

justment can only be made when the vehicle is

at a standstill or in a very low speed range.

If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed

successively on the control display.

Sensors

Depending on the equipment, the system is

controlled by the following sensors:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

▷

Camera behind the windshield.

Front radar sensor.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"

7. "Off"

Radar sensors, side, front.

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

Speed range

The system issues a warning of a possi-

ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.

3 mph/5 km/h.

Setting the warning time

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated

temporarily.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"

7. Select the desired setting.

Some functions are deactivated earlier.

The system is enabled as soon as the speed

drops below these values again.

The more sensitive the warning time is set to

be, the more warnings will be displayed. The

system can therefore also issue more early or

unfounded warnings and reactions.

Turning the Forward Collision

Mitigation on/off

Turning on the system automatically

Depending on the national-market version, the

system is automatically active after every de-

parture.

The system checks for visual impairments. De-

pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver

Attention Camera in the instrument cluster

captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility

and field of vision also affect the timing of the

warnings.

Turning on system manually

The system is activated by setting the warning

time.

Display in the instrument cluster

The following indicator lights and warning

lights are shown on the instrument cluster and,

depending on vehicle equipment, on the Head-

up display:

Additional information:

Setting the warning time, refer to page 178.

178

Safety

CONTROLS

Depending on the equipment and situation

in case of risk of imminent collision, the

system can also intervene with an auto-

matic brake intervention and automatically

decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a

complete stop.

Icon

Meaning

Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a

pedestrian.

Risk of collision, for instance with an

oncoming or a vehicle driving ahead.

When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and

hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle

is used.

Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle

crossing from the right.

Automatic brake intervention

In case of a risk of collision, the system can

assist with an automatic brake intervention, if

necessary.

Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle

crossing from the left.

General risk of collision.

When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,

the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic

Stability Control activates automatically.

The corresponding indicator lights and warn-

ing lights may display differently if the system

detects multiple objects.

A brake intervention can be canceled by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient

force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively

steering.

Warning function

The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-

ferent warning levels, depending on the re-

spective hazardous situation.

Depending on the equipment and situation,

the brake intervention can occur up to approx.

155 mph/250 km/h.

In the event of a prewarning, a warning light

illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-

ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning

tone sounds.

At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,

only a brief brake intervention will occur.

System limits

In the event of a system warning, the driver

must intervene immediately and in accordance

with the situation.

Safety information

▷

Red warning light illuminates:

Warning

A hazardous situation has been detected.

Increased awareness is required.

Because of system limitations, this system

may either not respond, or respond too late,

incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk

of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-

formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding

the scope of the system’s operation and limi-

tations.

Red warning light flashes:

There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-

diately.

A warning signal sounds:

There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-

diately.

Automatic brake intervention:

179

Safety

CONTROLS

Detection capability

The system's detection capability is limited.

General information

The system only takes into account objects

that are located in the detection range of the

installed sensors and are detected by the sys-

tem.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area

is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.

Thus, a system response might not come or

might come late.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

The system issues a warning of a possible risk

of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-

prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings

may vary with the current driving situation.

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

Functional limitations

The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-

dling when responding. If an active driving

style is detected, warnings and brake interven-

tions occur less frequently.

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

▷

In tight curves.

With limitation of the driving stability control

systems.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-

ward Collision Mitigation”.

▷

Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation

when towing.

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

Warning function in forward

collision situations

Icon

Meaning

Forward Collision Warning with a de-

tected vehicle.

Principle

The warning function in forward collision situa-

tions warns of a possible risk of collision and

may brake independently.

General risk of collision.

In the event of an accident, the system helps

by reducing impact speed.

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene.

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 177.

180

Safety

CONTROLS

prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings

may vary with the current driving situation.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-

sion Mitigation" chapter.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-

ward Collision Mitigation”.

Detection range

The following situations may not be detected,

or only detected with a delay, for instance:

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

▷

Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-

proached at high speed.

Icon

Meaning

Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.

Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-

hicle is detected.

Vehicles with unusual rear designs.

General risk of collision.

Warning function for

oncoming traffic

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene.

Principle

In case of a possible risk of collision, a brake

intervention is triggered.

The warning function for oncoming traffic can

warn of a possible risk of collision with oncom-

ing vehicles and may brake independently.

Additional information:

In the event of an accident, the system helps

by reducing impact speed.

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 177.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-

sion Mitigation" chapter.

Detection range

The following situations may not be detected,

for instance:

▷

Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.

Vehicles with an unusual front view.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

The system issues a warning of a possible risk

of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-

181

Safety

CONTROLS

Icon

Meaning

Warning function for turning

with oncoming traffic

Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-

hicle is detected.

Principle

General risk of collision.

There is a risk of an accident with oncom-

ing vehicles when turning across the oncom-

ing lane. The system can issue a warning of

a possible risk of collision and activate the

brakes independently, if needed.

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene.

In the event of an accident, the system helps

by reducing impact speed.

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 177.

General information

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-

sion Mitigation" chapter.

Detection range

The following situations may not be detected,

for instance:

▷

Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.

Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.

Vehicles with an unusual front view.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

The system issues a warning of a possible risk

of collision with oncoming vehicles at speeds

from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of

warnings may vary with the current driving sit-

uation.

Upper speed limit

The system is active when the own speed is

below approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-

ward Collision Mitigation”.

Warning function for

pedestrians

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

Principle

At speeds that are common in towns and cit-

ies, the warning function warns the driver of a

possible risk of collision with pedestrians and

cyclists. The system may brake automatically.

In the event of an accident, the system helps

by reducing impact speed.

182

Safety

CONTROLS

General information

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene.

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 177.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-

sion Mitigation" chapter.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range when on a straight line.

Detection range

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range when turning.

The detection range consists of the following

parts:

▷

Area in front of the vehicle, arrow 1.

The system issues a warning of a possible

risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at

speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.

With side radar sensors in front: side areas,

arrows 2.

The following situations may not be detected,

for instance:

Safety information

Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-

ward Collision Mitigation”.

▷

Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.

Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of their contour or posture.

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe-

destrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.

▷

Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-

sors to detect.

Icon

Meaning

Upper speed limit

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

system responds to pedestrians and cyclists

when your vehicle speed is less than approx.

50 mph/80 km/h.

Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a

pedestrian.

General risk of collision.

183

Safety

CONTROLS

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

Warning function at

intersections

Icon

Meaning

Principle

Risk of collision with vehicle crossing

from the right.

At speeds that are common in towns and cit-

ies, the Intersection Collision Warning function

can warn the driver of a possible risk of colli-

sion with crossing traffic at intersections and

junctions. The system may brake automati-

cally.

Risk of collision with vehicle crossing

from the left.

General risk of collision.

In the event of an accident, the system helps

by reducing impact speed.

General information

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene.

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 177.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-

sion Mitigation" chapter.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

Detection range

The following situations may not be detected,

for instance:

Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be

detected by the system as soon as these vehi-

cles enter into detection range of the sensors.

▷

Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,

e.g. by buildings.

At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-

sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-

fic is detected.

▷

Vehicles with an unusual side view.

The system issues a warning of a possible risk

of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-

prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.

Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-

tions.

Upper speed limit

The system responds to crossing vehicles

when the vehicle speed is below approx.

50 mph/80 km/h.

The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-

rent driving situation.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-

ward Collision Mitigation”.

184

Safety

CONTROLS

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle or detected person, e.g., a pedestrian,

a warning light is displayed.

Evasion Assistant

Principle

The Evasion Assistant can help the driver per-

form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,

e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear

suddenly.

Icon

Meaning

Warning when a vehicle is detected.

General information

Risk of collision with a pedestrian.

Risk of collision with unknown obsta-

cle.

Warning function with evasion

support

If the vehicle approaches another object at a

high differential speed, a warning is displayed

if there is an immediate risk of collision.

The system issues a warning and intervenes

to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-

neuver is possible.

Intervene in case of a warning.

Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in

front of the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle

equipment, the areas next to the vehicle are

also monitored.

The system is designed to provide assistance

during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk

of collision.

A message in the instrument cluster and, de-

pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-

play signals the evasion support.

If the system detects sufficient free space

alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver per-

form an evasive maneuver safely.

System limits

Safety information

Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-

ward Collision Mitigation”.

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-

sion Mitigation" chapter.

Functional requirements

Detection range

The following situations may not be detected,

for instance:

▷

Forward Collision Mitigation is active.

▷

Sensors detect sufficient clearance around

vehicle.

▷

Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-

proached at high speed.

Speed range

The Evasion Assistant helps the driver

when the vehicle speed is between approx.

19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.

▷

Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.

185

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

Vehicles with unusual rear designs.

Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward

Collision Mitigation" chapter.

Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of their contour or posture.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

▷

Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-

sors to detect.

▷

Radar sensors, side, rear.

Functional limitation

The system is deactivated if the trailer power

socket is occupied or trailer towing is activated,

e.g., when using a trailer or rear bicycle rack.

Depending on the equipment: radar sen-

sors, side, front.

Turning the exit warning on/off

Turning on the system automatically

The exit warning activates automatically after

departure if the function was switched on at

the completion of the last trip.

Exit warning

Principle

The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.

Turning system off manually

The system can warn the occupants when

they are opening the doors and a risk of colli-

sion with approaching objects is detected.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Exit warning"

General information

7. Select the desired setting.

Adjusting the exit warning

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Exit warning"

Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor

the area behind the vehicle.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area

around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is

monitored as well. Two additional radar sen-

sors are located in the front bumper.

7. Select the desired setting.

Turning the warning signal on/off

The system monitors the vehicle's surround-

ings for a limited time after you get in or park.

1.

Apps menu

A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-

ous warning functions.

2. "Vehicle"

186

Safety

CONTROLS

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Exit warning"

There is a risk of collision when opening the

doors.

System limits

7. "Warning tone"

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-

ing systems" chapter.

Displays

Warning light in exterior mirror

Detection range

The following situations may not be detected,

for instance:

▷

Fully or partially hidden objects.

Stationary or very slow objects.

Pedestrians.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

The warning light in the exterior mirror warns

of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.

▷

The speed of an approaching vehicle is too

fast or too slow.

▷

In curves.

Ambient light

Depending on the equipment, warnings are

also indicated by the ambient light in the inte-

rior.

In case of fully or partially hidden objects.

Lane Departure Warning

with active return

Warning function

Prewarning

Principle

The lane departure warning alerts when the

vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the

lane.

In the event of an advance warning, the warn-

ing light in the exterior mirror illuminates. De-

pending on the equipment, the ambient light

also flashes.

An automatic steering intervention helps to

keep the vehicle in its lane.

An object was detected in the opening area.

Increased awareness is required.

Acute warning

In the event of an acute warning, the warn-

ing light in the exterior mirror flashes, as does

the ambient light, depending on vehicle equip-

ment. In addition, a signal tone sounds.

187

Safety

CONTROLS

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate

General information

Functional requirement

The camera must detect the lane boundaries

for the lane departure warning to be active.

The areas of the sensors must be clean and

clear.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

Sensors

Depending on the equipment, the system is

controlled by the following sensors:

The system issues a warning starting at a min-

imum speed. The minimum speed is country-

specific and displayed on the control display.

▷

Camera behind the windshield.

Front radar sensor.

Various warning functions from this system

help the driver keep their vehicle in their lane.

Radar sensor, side, front.

The system does not provide a warning if the

turn signal is set in the respective direction be-

fore exiting the lane.

Turning the Lane Departure

Warning on/off

Turning on the system automatically

Depending on the national-market version, the

system is automatically active after every de-

parture.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

road and traffic situations. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate Do not jerk the steering

wheel in response to a warning.

Turning on system manually

The system is activated by the selected warn-

ing setting.

Additional information:

Configuring the warning, refer to page 189.

Turning system off manually

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, you must successively confirm

the switch-off on the control display.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.

Due to its limits, the system may not issue

warnings or responses, or these may be is-

sued late or in a manner that is not consis-

tent with their normal use. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

188

Safety

CONTROLS

6. "Lane Departure Warning"

7. "Off"

6. "Vibration intensity"

7. Select the desired setting.

The setting is applied to all collision warning

systems.

Setting Lane Departure Warning

Configuring the warning

Depending on the national-market

version: turning steering intervention

on/off

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

1.

Apps menu

3. "Driving settings"

2. "Vehicle"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane Departure Warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane Departure Warning"

7. "Steering intervention"

▷

"Expanded"

If the system detects that your vehicle

is about to leave your lane or cross a

lane marking, a warning is issued. The

system performs a steering intervention.

Depending on the national-market version, the

steering intervention is automatically active af-

ter every driving off.

▷

"In dangerous situations"

Display in the instrument cluster

Different system statuses are displayed on

the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle

equipment and national-market version.

Broken road lines: If the system detects

that the vehicle is about to inadvertently

cross a lane marking, or if the sensors

detect an oncoming vehicle, a warning

is issued and a steering intervention is

performed.

Icon

Meaning

Indicator light flashes green: System

is actively issuing a warning. If neces-

sary, the system performs a steering

intervention.

Depending on national-market version,

with continuous lane markings: If the

system detects that your vehicle is

about to inadvertently leave your lane

or cross a lane marking, a warning is is-

sued and a steering intervention is per-

formed.

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, information for the system is

displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-

ment cluster.

Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration

Additional information:

1.

Apps menu

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

189

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

While Dynamic Stability Control regulates

driving stability.

Warning function

General information

Different warnings are issued by the Lane De-

parture Warning system, depending on situa-

tion and speed:

▷

While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.

Immediately following a steering interven-

tion by the vehicle systems.

End of warning

For instance, the warning or an active steering

intervention will be canceled in the following

situations:

▷

Indicator lights and warning lights on the

instrument cluster.

▷

Vibration of steering wheel.

Steering intervention.

Warning tone.

▷

Automatically after a few seconds.

When returning to your own lane.

With hard accelerating or braking.

With hazard warning system switched on.

When flashing.

Steering wheel vibration

If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary

has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates

in accordance with the steering wheel vibration

setting.

While Dynamic Stability Control regulates

driving stability.

Additionally, a light is displayed on the instru-

ment cluster.

▷

Immediately following a steering interven-

tion by the vehicle systems.

When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-

responding direction before changing the lane,

a warning is not issued.

▷

With manual steering intervention.

When another driver assistance system is

activated, if applicable.

Steering intervention

▷

No lane boundaries detected.

Depending on the equipment and the national-

market version: if a lane marking is crossed in

the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the

system intervenes with a brief active steering

intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-

tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle

within the lane. The steering intervention can

be noticed on the steering wheel and can be

manually overridden at any time.

When the system limits are reached.

Warning signal

A warning tone sounds if the driver does

not actively steer after the Lane Departure

Warning system has performed multiple active

steering interventions within one minute.

In addition, a Check Control message is dis-

played.

During an active steering intervention, a light is

displayed on the instrument cluster.

The warning tone and Check Control message

advise the driver to pay closer attention to their

lane.

For instance, the steering intervention will be

suppressed in the following situations:

The longer warning tone is stopped if the

driver takes control of the steering.

▷

With hard accelerating or braking.

When flashing.

With trailer towing

If the trailer power socket is occupied or trailer

towing is activated, for instance during opera-

With hazard warning system switched on.

In driving situation with high driving dynam-

ics.

190

Safety

CONTROLS

tion with trailer, no steering intervention takes

place.

Active Blind Spot Detection

with active return

If using a rear carrier on the trailer hitch, this

restriction does not apply when trailer towing is

activated on the control display.

Principle

Additional information:

Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles

in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from

behind in the adjacent lane.

Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to

page 318.

The warning light in the exterior mirror gives

warnings at different levels.

System limits

An automatic steering intervention helps to

keep the vehicle in its lane.

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-

ing systems" chapter.

General information

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

▷

In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,

merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-

daries such as in construction areas.

With lane boundaries that are covered in

snow, ice, dirt or water.

Radar sensors monitor the area behind and

next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a

minimum speed.

▷

In tight corners or on narrow roads.

With lane boundaries that are covered by

objects.

The minimum speed is country-specific and

displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection

menu.

▷

When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.

Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

The system indicates whether there are vehi-

cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching

from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The

warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates

dimly.

While Dynamic Stability Control regulates

driving stability.

While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.

The system will warn in the previously named

situations prior to a lane change. The warn-

ing light in the exterior mirror flashes and the

steering wheel vibrates.

A Check Control message may be displayed

when the system is limited. A yellow warning

light also illuminates, depending on national-

market version.

When turning at a speed of up to approx.

12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not

vibrate.

191

Safety

CONTROLS

Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward

Collision Mitigation" chapter.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Sensors

3. "Driving settings"

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

6. "Vibration intensity"

7. Select the desired setting.

▷

Camera behind the windshield.

Radar sensors, side, rear.

Depending on the equipment: radar sen-

sors, side, front.

The setting is applied to all collision warning

systems.

Functional requirement

The areas of the sensors must be clean and

clear.

Depending on the national-market

version: turning steering intervention

on/off

1.

Apps menu

Turning Active Blind Spot Detection

on/off

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

1.

Apps menu

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"

7. "Steering intervention"

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"

7. Select the desired setting.

Warning function

Warning light in exterior mirror

Adjusting the Active Blind Spot

Detection

Configuring the warning

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"

7. Select the desired setting.

The warning light in the exterior mirror warns

of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.

192

Safety

CONTROLS

The warning function may be restricted. Warn-

ings can be displayed late or not at all, e.g., if

the speed of the approaching vehicle is much

higher than your own speed. An increased

number of unwarranted warnings may occur.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Prewarning

The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror

indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot

or approaching from the rear.

Acute warning

When an acute warning occurs, the steering

wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the

exterior mirror flashes brightly.

Warning light flashing

When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light

in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing

purposes.

An acute warning is issued if the following con-

ditions are met:

▷

Another vehicle is located in the critical

area.

System limits

Your own vehicle is approaching the other

lane.

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-

ing systems" chapter.

Depending on the system setting when the

turn signal is turned on.

Upper speed limit

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated

temporarily.

The warning stops when the other vehicle has

left the critical area.

Steering intervention

Depending on the national-market version:

when there is no response to the vibration

of the steering wheel at speeds of up to

130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking

is crossed, the system engages the active

steering intervention. The steering intervention

helps return the vehicle into the lane. The

steering intervention can be noticed on the

steering wheel and can be manually overrid-

den at any time.

If the vehicle speed falls below approx.

155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.

Displaying warnings

The number of warnings shown depends on

how the settings are configured. However,

there may also be an excess of unwarranted

warnings of critical situations.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

The steering intervention is carried out from

a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-

played on the control display.

▷

When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own.

With trailer towing

▷

In tight corners or on narrow roads.

No steering intervention is performed when the

trailer power socket is occupied or trailer tow-

ing is activated. This system does not issue a

pre-warning.

The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,

for instance by stickers.

Depending on the national-market version, the

steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-

tions:

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version: An acute warning continues to

be issued if there is a risk of collision.

193

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,

merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-

daries such as in construction areas.

with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a col-

lision. For this purpose, the system issues a

warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-

ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating

steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering

intervention is performed by the system.

With lane boundaries that are covered in

snow, ice, dirt or water.

▷

With lane boundaries that are not white.

With lane boundaries that are covered by

objects.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward

Collision Mitigation" chapter.

▷

When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.

▷

If the camera is impaired.

Functional requirement

The camera behind the windshield determines

the lane boundary positions.

Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

A Check Control message may be displayed

when the system is limited. A yellow warning

light also illuminates, depending on national-

market version.

The camera must detect the lane markings for

the side collision mitigation with steering inter-

vention to be active.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

Side collision mitigation

▷

Camera behind the windshield.

Radar sensors, side, front.

Radar sensors, side, rear.

Principle

The side-collision warning helps to avoid an

impending side collision.

Turning the side collision warning

on/off

General information

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Side collision warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

Radar sensors monitor the space next to the

vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum

speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.

Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration

1.

Apps menu

The minimum speed is country-specific and

displayed on the control display.

2. "Vehicle"

If, for example, another vehicle is detected next

to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision

3. "Driving settings"

194

Safety

CONTROLS

4. "Driver Assistance"

steering intervention can be noticed on the

steering wheel and can be manually overrid-

den at any time.

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

6. "Vibration intensity"

7. Select the desired setting.

System limits

The setting is applied to all collision warning

systems.

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-

ing systems" chapter.

Display in the instrument cluster

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, information for the system is

displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-

ment cluster.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

Additional information:

▷

In tight corners or on narrow roads.

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,

merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-

daries such as in construction areas.

Warning function

▷

With lane boundaries that are covered in

snow, ice, dirt or water.

Warning light in exterior mirror

▷

With lane boundaries that are not white.

With lane boundaries that are covered by

objects.

▷

When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.

Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

A Check Control message may be displayed

when the system is limited.

The warning light in the exterior mirror warns

of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.

The system is inactive when the trailer power

socket is occupied or trailer towing is activated,

e.g., when using a trailer or rear bicycle rack. A

Check Control message is displayed.

Acute warning

If there is a risk of collision, the warning light

in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering

wheel starts vibrating.

Rear-end collision

preparation

A Check Control message is displayed at the

same time.

Principle

Steering intervention

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the rear-end collision prepara-

tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-

hind.

Depending on the national-market version,

if necessary, the system engages the active

steering intervention to prevent a collision and

maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The

195

Safety

CONTROLS

General information

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-

ing systems" chapter.

Functional limitations

This function may be restricted if the speed

of the approaching vehicle is much higher or

similar to your own speed.

Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-

hicle.

Traffic Light And Sign

Warning

When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a

certain speed, the system can react as follows:

▷

Where applicable, the hazard warning

flashers will be switched on.

Principle

▷

Where applicable, the PreCrash functions

are triggered.

The Traffic Light And Sign Warning provides

support in situations in which the right-of-way

needs to be yielded based on road signs or

traffic lights.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward

Collision Mitigation" chapter.

General information

The system evaluates traffic signs and traffic

lights using a camera behind the windshield.

Sensors

The navigation system directs information on

the road layout to the system.

The system is controlled by the radar sensors

on the sides and rear.

A warning is given if the right of way is about

to be violated, e.g., in the following traffic situa-

tions:

Turning rear-end collision

preparation on/off

The system is automatically active when the

vehicle is turned on.

▷

At an intersection.

At a road entrance.

On a highway entrance ramp.

At a roundabout.

The system is deactivated in the following sit-

uations:

▷

When driving in reverse.

With a red traffic light.

When the trailer power socket is occupied

or trailer towing is activated, e.g., when us-

ing a trailer or rear bicycle rack.

The system issues a warning as from a vari-

able minimum speed and at speeds up to ap-

prox. 60 mph/100 km/h.

The following traffic signs are taken into ac-

count for the Traffic Light And Sign Warning:

196

Safety

CONTROLS

4. "Driver Assistance"

Sign Meaning

Give way signs:

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

A pre-warning is issued for these

road signs.

The selected setting is saved and adopted for

the next journey.

Stop signs:

A pre-warning is issued for these

road signs.

Warning function

When traffic lights are red, a pre-

warning and an acute warning will be

issued.

General information

The system issues a two-phase warning:

▷

Prewarning: visual warning by an icon in

the instrument cluster.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward

Collision Mitigation" chapter.

Acute warning: visual warning by an icon

in the instrument cluster and an additional

acoustic signal.

Functional requirement

The right-of-way situation ahead of the vehicle

must be clearly controlled by traffic signs or

light signal systems.

The timing of the warning varies with the ac-

tual driving situation and the warning time set-

ting.

Prewarning

If there is a risk that a right of way is about to

be violated, one of the following icons appears

in the instrument cluster:

Sensors

The system is controlled by a camera behind

the windshield.

Icon

Meaning

Turning the Traffic Light And Sign

Warning on/off

Give way.

1.

Apps menu

Stop.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

Red traffic light.

When a prewarning is issued, intervene as

appropriate for the situation; for example, by

braking.

Setting the warning time

1.

Apps menu

Acute warning

2. "Vehicle"

If there is an acute risk that the right of way

is about to be violated, an acoustic signal will

3. "Driving settings"

197

Safety

CONTROLS

sound and one of the following icons will ap-

pear in the instrument cluster:

▷

If the traffic signs do not correspond to the

standard.

When traffic signs are detected that apply

to a junction or parallel street.

Icon

Meaning

Red traffic light.

In the presence of country-specific road

signs or road layouts.

With intersections with flashing light signal

systems.

When an acute warning is issued, intervene as

appropriate for the situation; for example, by

braking.

Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

In the case of navigation data that is inva-

lid, outdated or not available.

Display in the Head-up display

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

warning is displayed simultaneously in the

Head-up display and in the instrument cluster.

In some regions, the system may not be

available or only partially available.

System limits

Wrong way warning

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-

ing systems" chapter.

Principle

The wrong way warning warns the driver of

an upcoming wrong entry onto roads, for in-

stance onto freeways, roundabouts and one-

way streets.

No warning

The system does not issue a warning in the

following situations, for example:

General information

Depending on the equipment version, the sys-

tem uses navigation data and traffic signs to

check the traffic situation.

▷

In right-of-way situations without right-of-

way signs, stop signs, or red light signal

systems.

With intersections with relevant traffic lights

that are illuminated yellow or green.

For example, the system takes the following

traffic signs into account:

▷

No entrance.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

Roundabout.

Directional arrows: mandatory bypass.

▷

If road signs or light signal systems are un-

clear.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward

Collision Mitigation" chapter.

If traffic signs or light signal systems are

fully or partially concealed or soiled.

If traffic signs or light signal systems are

difficult to read or rotated.

Functional requirement

The road layout ahead must be controlled

clearly with traffic signs.

If traffic signs or light signal systems are

too small or too large.

198

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

When traffic signs are detected that apply

to a junction or parallel street.

Sensors

The system is controlled by a camera behind

the windshield.

In the presence of country-specific road

signs or road layouts.

Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

Turning wrong way warning on/off

Depending on national-market version, the

wrong way warning is automatically activated

whenever you start driving.

In the case of navigation data that is inva-

lid, outdated or not available.

It may not be possible to use the system in

all regions.

Warning function

A warning is displayed and a signal

tone sounds, for example when the ve-

hicle is traveling in the wrong direction

on a highway, roundabout or one-way street.

No Turn on Red function

Principle

Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-

ter and, depending on the equipment, in the

Head-up display.

This function provides assistance to the driver

at traffic lights where turning on red is prohib-

ited.

To do so, this function analyzes traffic lights

and traffic signs using the camera behind the

windshield. In addition, the navigation system

data is used.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-

ing systems" chapter.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward

Collision Mitigation" chapter.

No warning

For example, the system does not issue a

warnings for road layouts without traffic signs.

Functional requirements

▷

The system detects the right-of-way situa-

tion ahead by analyzing traffic lights and

traffic signs.

Functional limitations

The function may be limited in the following

situations, for instance, and will either output

an incorrect wrong way warning or no warning

at all:

▷

Vehicle is less than approx. 164 ft/50 m

from the traffic lights.

Depending on vehicle equipment: the Traf-

fic Light And Sign Warning is turned on.

▷

When the signage is not clear.

If the traffic signs are fully or partially con-

cealed or soiled.

Sensors

▷

If the traffic signs are poorly legible or ro-

tated.

The system is controlled by a camera behind

the windshield.

▷

If the traffic signs are too small or too large.

If the traffic signs do not correspond to the

standard.

199

Safety

CONTROLS

Display in the instrument cluster

Emergency Stop Assistant

If the driver approaches a red traffic

light with a traffic sign that prohibits

a turn on red, an indicator light is dis-

played on the instrument cluster.

Principle

If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle

safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to

bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.

The indicator light goes out automatically after

you drive off at a speed greater than approx.

9 mph/15 km/h.

General information

The Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered au-

tomatically.

System limits

When the system is triggered, the vehicle is

brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of

lane keeping.

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-

ing systems" chapter.

Safety information

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

one's physical state. An increasing lack of

alertness or fatigue may not be detected or

not be detected in time. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. Make

sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions.

▷

If road signs or light signal systems are un-

clear.

If traffic signs or light signal systems are

fully or partially concealed or soiled.

If traffic signs or light signal systems are

difficult to read or rotated.

If traffic signs or light signal systems are

too small or too large.

If the traffic signs do not correspond to the

standard.

Functional requirements

▷

The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated

via iDrive.

With intersections with flashing light signal

systems.

The system is activated from a speed of

approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.

In the case of navigation data that is inva-

lid, outdated or not available.

The Driver Attention Camera detects driver

activity.

In some regions, this function may not be

completely available or not available at all.

Triggering the Emergency Stop

Assistant

If the system detects that the driver is no

longer driving the vehicle safely or ignores

warnings, the Emergency Stop Assistant is

triggered automatically. The triggered system

is displayed in the instrument cluster.

200

Safety

CONTROLS

The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be

triggered via voice input.

▷

By turning off the hazard warning system.

By firmly countersteering.

Additional information:

By changing the selector lever position

when the vehicle was already at a stand-

still.

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to

page 57.

An immediate emergency call can be triggered

on the control display.

At standstill

As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-

tem will carry out the following settings:

The following is performed automatically when

the Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered:

▷

The vehicle is secured against rolling away.

The interior lights are switched on.

▷

In SPORT drive mode, the vehicle switches

automatically to ROAD drive mode.

A display is shown on the instrument clus-

ter.

The central locking system is unlocked.

The system takes over vehicle handling un-

til the vehicle comes to a standstill.

Display in the instrument cluster

Icon

Status

▷

The hazard warning system is switched on.

An emergency call is triggered when sta-

tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.

Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-

gered.

Activating/deactivating Emergency

Stop Assistant

System limits

The system cannot replace the roadworthy

driving performance of a driver.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

The Emergency Stop Assistant may be re-

stricted in the following situations:

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Emergency stop"

7. Select the desired setting.

▷

When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-

ered by the steering wheel.

▷

With sunglasses with high protection from

infrared light.

Canceling Emergency Stop

Assistant

The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-

sistant by actively taking control of driving the

vehicle throughout the entire process.

Cross Traffic Warning with

Braking

Principle

The system is stopped by the following ac-

tions, for example:

At blind driveway exits or when driving out of

perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-

proaching from the side are detected sooner

by the cross traffic warning than is possible

from the driver's seat.

▷

By firmly pressing the accelerator pedal.

By stopping the system on the control dis-

play.

▷

By operating the turn signal.

201

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

Radar sensors, side, rear.

General information

Depending on the equipment: radar sen-

sors, side, front.

Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic

Warning

The system must be activated on the control

display for the Cross Traffic Warning and brake

intervention to switch on automatically.

1.

Apps menu

The area behind the vehicle is monitored by

sensors.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Parking"

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area

around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is

monitored as well.

The system indicates approaching road users.

6. Depending on the equipment, select the

following setting:

If there is a collision risk when reversing, the

system will provide assistance by performing

an automatic brake intervention.

▷

"Rear warning"

"Front and rear warning"

"Brake intervention at rear"

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Turning on the cross traffic warning

automatically

Safety information

The system must be activated on the control

display. The system turns on automatically as

soon as Park Distance Control or a camera

view activates and you engage a gear position.

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is

switched on.

Depending on the equipment, the front system

is turned on when a gear position is engaged.

Depending on the national-market version, the

system is automatically active when the vehi-

cle is started.

Turning off the cross traffic warning

automatically

The system is automatically turned off in the

following situations:

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

202

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

When the speed exceeds walking speed.

Display in the Park Distance Control view

When a certain distance covered is ex-

ceeded.

Warning function

General information

The control display shows the corresponding

view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-

sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-

ror flashes.

In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-

tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are

detected by the sensors.

In case of a brake intervention, a message is

displayed on the control display and close after

a brief period of time.

Display in camera image

Visual warning

Warning light in exterior mirror

Depending on the direction of travel, the view

to the front or back is displayed in the camera

image.

The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes

if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when

the vehicle is reversing.

The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the

camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-

tected by the sensors.

Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your

own vehicle.

Acoustic warning

In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone

sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-

spective direction.

Depending on the national-market version, the

signal tone will already sound when the gear

position is engaged.

203

Safety

CONTROLS

System limits

General information

Video recordings can be saved in different

ways:

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

▷

Automatic storage of the recording.

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

The function makes it possible to document

the accident or theft of the vehicle with the

corresponding recording type set.

Functional limitations

The function can be limited, for instance in the

following situations:

▷

Manual storage of the recording.

This function is used to document traffic sit-

uations with the configured recording type.

▷

In tight curves.

Crossing objects are moving at a very slow

or a very fast speed.

The assistance systems' cameras are used to

record, e.g., Panorama View.

▷

Other objects that hide cross traffic are in

the capture range of the sensors.

Additionally, the following parameters are

stored for the trip:

If the trailer power socket is occupied or

trailer towing is activated, the cross traffic

warning is not available for the area behind

the vehicle.

▷

Date.

Time.

Vehicle speed.

Global Positioning System coordinates.

BMW Drive Recorder

Data protection

The permissibility of recording and using video

recordings is contingent upon the statutory

regulations of the country in which the system

is to be used. The user is responsible for the

use of the system and compliance with respec-

tive applicable regulations.

Principle

The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video

recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to

document surrounding traffic.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends

confirming there are no statutory or regulatory

constraints on use of the system in your state

or country prior to the initial use. In addition,

the laws with respect to use of the system

should be verified in regular intervals, espe-

cially when borders are frequently crossed.

Vehicle features and options

This system may not be available in the

owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-

tional equipment, the national-market version

or the option for later enabling and software

updates. This also applies to individual func-

tions of the system.

Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed

about the system. In addition, information

about the system is required when handing off

the vehicle.

For information on whether a function is cur-

rently available in the vehicle or when the func-

tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an

authorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

204

Safety

CONTROLS

Depending on the selected recording dura-

tion, the system saves the recording after it

has been triggered.

Functional requirements

▷

Standby state or drive-ready state is

switched on.

When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-

sage is sent to the My BMW App.

▷

BMW Drive Recorder is activated.

Privacy Policy was accepted.

Recording type was selected.

Recording time was selected.

After saving the recording, the reduced

quality video can be downloaded to a mo-

bile device.

Theft notification:

If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic

recording may be taken.

▷

The theft notification was activated in the

Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-

corder menu.

Manual recording

▷

Data transfer is activated.

Using the button

My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-

vice.

▷

My BMW App is linked with the Connected-

Drive account.

Privacy Policy was accepted.

Activating/deactivating the BMW

Drive Recorder

The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated

before the first use of the recording function.

Press and hold this button.

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

Via iDrive

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. Accept Privacy Policy.

5. "Settings"

Start the recording:

1.

Apps menu

6. "Allow recording"

7. Select the desired setting.

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Recording"

Recording functions

5. "Start recording"

Stop the recording: "Stop recording".

Automatic recording

The recording is automatically stored when the

vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.

The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-

onds before and after storage is triggered.

▷

In case of accident:

Recording playback and

administration

Stored video recordings can be played back,

exported and deleted.

The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-

onds before and after storage is triggered.

▷

In case of theft:

205

Safety

CONTROLS

For your own safety, the video recording is

only displayed on the control display up to ap-

prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market

versions, the video recording is only displayed

if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-

tor lever is in the P position.

Functional requirements

▷

Privacy Policy was accepted.

▷

BMW Drive Recorder is activated.

To transfer recordings to a mobile device:

▷

Depending on vehicle equipment, a mobile

device is connected to the vehicle via Wi-Fi

and Bluetooth audio, or a USB storage de-

vice is connected.

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Recordings"

▷

My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-

vice.

5. Select desired recording.

6. If necessary, select camera.

My BMW App is linked with the Connected-

Drive account.

The My BMW App is permitted to access

your photo library.

Settings

Recording

Recording type

The recording can be started and stopped

manually.

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

Start the recording:

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Settings"

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

5. Select the desired setting.

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Recording"

Recording time

1.

Apps menu

5. "Start recording"

Stop the recording: "Stop recording".

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Settings"

Cameras

Different cameras can be selected.

5. Select the desired setting.

1.

Apps menu

Recording on a mobile device

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Settings"

Principle

Depending on the equipment version, video

recordings can be stored directly on a mobile

device such as a smartphone or USB storage.

5. "Cam. selection"

6. Select desired camera.

General information

Depending on national-market version: The

storable video length depends on the mobile

device's available storage space.

System limits

In the event of serious accidents, it may not

be possible to store recordings if the damage

206

Safety

CONTROLS

on the vehicle is too great or the power supply

was interrupted.

▷

Forward Collision Mitigation: automatic

brake intervention.

If you repeatedly overwrite a USB drive, it may

not be possible to export recordings correctly.

▷

Forward Collision Mitigation: brake booster.

Rear-end collision preparation: detection of

impending rear-end collisions.

The preferred file system for USB storage is

NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.

Safety information

In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-

tomatically when the anti-theft warning system

has been triggered.

Warning

If the internet connection is weak or cannot be

established, theft alerts and video downloads

may be restricted or not available.

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the

system limits, critical situations might not be

detected reliably or in time. There is a risk

of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-

ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and

actively intervene where appropriate

The quality of the Wi-Fi connection affects

whether recordings can be saved on your

smartphone. This function may be restricted or

not available if the connection is weak.

Active Protection

Function

Depending on the equipment and require-

ments, the following individual functions are

active in accident-critical driving situations:

Principle

Active Protection prepares occupants and the

vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving

or collision situations.

▷

Automatic closing of the windows.

The windows remain open with a small

gap.

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, Active Protection consists of

various PreCrash functions.

▷

Automatic positioning of the backrest for

the front passenger seat.

Systems can be returned to the desired set-

tings following a critical driving situation with-

out accident.

The system is used to detect certain critical

driving situations that might lead to an acci-

dent. This includes the following critical driving

situations:

PostCrash iBrake

▷

Emergency braking.

Severe understeering.

Severe oversteering.

Principle

In certain accident situations, the PostCrash

iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a

standstill without intervention by the driver.

Certain functions of several systems can,

within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-

tion triggering:

General information

The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a

further collision and its consequences.

207

Safety

CONTROLS

accident, injury, and property damage. Make

sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions.

At standstill

After coming to a halt, the brake is released

automatically.

Harder vehicle deceleration

In certain situations, it may be necessary to

bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than

automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake.

Break recommendation

Function

Once a drive is started, this function is trained

to the driver, enabling it to detect when the

driver is less alert or is fatigued.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to the

brake. The brake pressure will then be higher

than the brake pressure generated by auto-

matic braking. Automatic braking with Post-

Crash iBrake is canceled.

This procedure takes, for example, the follow-

ing criteria into account:

▷

Personal driving style, for instance steering

behavior.

Abort automatic braking

It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash

iBrake automatic braking in certain situations,

e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.

Driving conditions, for instance time, length

of trip.

Depending on the equipment: attention

of the driver through the Driver Attention

Camera.

Abort automatic braking:

▷

By depressing the brake pedal for slightly

longer.

This function activates at speeds greater than

approx. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display

a break recommendation.

▷

By pressing the accelerator pedal for

slightly longer.

Setting break recommendation

The break recommendation can be switched

on, off and adjusted via iDrive.

Fatigue alert

1.

Apps menu

Principle

2. "Vehicle"

The Fatigue Alert break recommendation fea-

ture can detect when the driver is fatigued

or less alert during long, monotonous trips,

for instance on highways. This function recom-

mends taking a break.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Fatigue Alert"

7. Select the desired setting.

Safety information

Despite this function being off, some driver as-

sistance systems may issue break recommen-

dations.

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

one's physical state. An increasing lack of

alertness or fatigue may not be detected or

not be detected in time. There is a risk of

Display

If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,

a message is displayed in the control display

with the recommendation to take a break.

208

Safety

CONTROLS

During the display, various settings can be se-

lected.

The steering wheel and driver’s seat height

must be adjusted so that the entire instrument

cluster is visible. This enables the Driver Atten-

tion Camera to record the driver’s entire face.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after

parking the vehicle. A break recommendation

can only be displayed again after this time has

elapsed.

Overview

System limits

The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If

the system is limited, either no warning may

be issued or an unwarranted warning may be

issued.

The break recommendation function may be

limited in the following situations:

▷

If the time is set incorrectly.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-

ment cluster may have some infrared light

sources. Depending on the light conditions,

these light sources can be visible when the

vehicle is in standby mode.

At a predominantly driven speed below ap-

prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.

▷

With a sporty driving style such as during

rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.

In active driving situations such as when

changing lanes frequently.

System limits

The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully

operational in the following situations:

▷

When the road condition is poor.

In the event of strong side winds.

▷

When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-

ered by the steering wheel.

Driver Attention Camera

▷

With sunglasses with high protection from

infrared light.

Principle

A camera in the instrument cluster monitors

the driver’s activity and, depending on the

equipment, the driver’s viewing direction.

General information

The assistance systems help drivers by ana-

lyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g.,

by evaluating their head position and eyes.

Functional requirements

For full operability, make sure that the field of

view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-

structed.

209

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options Brake assistant

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

The brake assistant automatically applies

maximum braking assistance when the brake

pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the

braking distance to a minimum for full braking.

Additional information:

To make full use of braking assistance, do not

reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during

full braking.

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Antilock Braking System

M Setup

Principle

The Antilock Braking System prevents locking

of the wheels during the braking process.

The SETUP button is used to configure various

driving dynamics and drive systems.

You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-

ing full braking, which increases active driving

safety.

General information

When the drive-ready state is switched on after

the idle state, an efficient vehicle condition is

active by default.

General information

The Antilock Braking System is ready after

each time drive-ready state is turned on.

Overview

Malfunction

Button in the center console

The warning light on the instrument

cluster illuminates.

A Check Control message is displayed.

▷

The Antilock Braking System is not availa-

ble.

Steerability is limited during full braking.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an

authorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

SETUP

210

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Buttons on the steering wheel

Icon

System

"M HYBRID": Hybrid modes of M Hy-

brid, refer to page 135.

Button Function

M1 configuration.

M Steptronic Sport transmission:

"Drivelogic": shift modes and Drive-

logic programs.

M2 configuration.

Drivelogic, refer to page 128.

"DSC": Dynamic Stability Control, re-

fer to page 215, and M Dynamic

Mode, refer to page 216.

Settings

Icon

System

"M Sound": Sound Control, refer to

page 136.

"Drivetrain": Drive, refer to page 135,

programs.

"Energy recovery": Energy recovery

modes, refer to page 121.

Operation via SETUP

General information

The settings from the SETUP button are ap-

plied directly. The settings are not saved.

"Chassis": Programs of Adaptive

M suspension, refer to page 276, and

settings of Integral Active Steering,

refer to page 221.

Configuring M Setup

"Steering": programs of Servotronic,

refer to page 214.

1.

Press the button.

2. Select the desired setting.

Operation via M1/M2

General information

"Brake": programs of brake, refer to

page 214.

"M xDrive": programs of M xDrive, re-

fer to page 217.

The settings for the driving dynamics and drive

systems can be configured for the M1/M2 but-

tons and retrieved if required.

The following systems can also be configured

for M1/M2:

With activated M1 or M2 configuration, any

changes to the setting are immediately ap-

plied.

When M1/M2 is deactivated or reset, the driv-

ing dynamics and drive systems are reset to

their default settings.

211

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Safety information

Disabling M1/M2

Press the corresponding button on the steering

wheel.

Warning

Depending on the setting, Dynamic Stability

Control may be restricted or not available

when the M1 or M2 button is activated. There

is a risk of accidents and risk of property

damage. Note the settings for Dynamic Sta-

bility Control in iDrive and take any necessary

action. Modify your driving style and react, if

necessary.

Resetting M1/M2

1.

Press the button.

2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2

CONFIGURATION"

3. "Reset"

4. "Reset M1 settings."

To cancel resetting: "Cancel"

Configuring M1/M2

Display in the instrument cluster

1.

Press the button.

Icon

Description

2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2

CONFIGURATION"

Icon illuminates: corresponding

configuration is activated.

3. Select the desired setting.

The individual settings are stored for the con-

figuration currently in use.

Alternatively, current system settings can be

directly saved to M1 or M2. To do this, press

and hold the desired button on the steering

wheel until an acoustic signal sounds.

Icon illuminates and "Function

cannot currently be activated."

appears: Configuration cannot

be activated due to current

driving situation.

Activating M1/M2

Press the corresponding button on the steering

wheel:

Reactivate configuration when

the lettering is not illuminated.

▷

Activate M1.

M MODE

▷

Activate M2.

Principle

Driver assistance and collision warning sys-

tems can be adapted to the situation via M

MODE.

"M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2

CONFIGURATION": If DSC OFF or M Dynamic

Mode is set, a message is displayed on the

instrument cluster. This message is confirmed

by pressing the button again.

The display on the instrument cluster and

the Head-up display view change with the se-

lected drive mode.

212

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

M MODE

General information

The following driving modes are available:

▷

"ROAD"

Driving modes

"SPORT"

ROAD drive mode

Safety information

▷

All available collision warning systems are

switched on.

Warning

▷

All available driver assistance systems are

active.

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk

of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-

ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and

actively intervene where appropriate

ROAD drive mode is activated after drive-

ready state is switched on.

SPORT drive mode

Depending on the equipment, the following

systems are deactivated:

▷

Speed control systems.

Warning

The vehicle automatically switches to ROAD

driving mode when you activate certain sys-

tems.

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.

Due to its limits, the system may not issue

warnings or responses, or these may be is-

sued late or in a manner that is not consis-

tent with their normal use. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate

Selecting the driving mode

ROAD and SPORT drive modes can only be

enabled when drive-ready state is switched

on.

1.

Press the button.

2. Select the desired setting.

Overview

In addition, the collision warning systems can

be adjusted.

Button in the vehicle

Additional information:

Collision warning systems, refer to page 177.

Display

The display changes according to the drive

mode selected. The view can be configured

individually.

213

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Selecting a program

Servotronic

Using the button

Principle

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power

steering function.

Press the button and select the desired

program on the control display.

The system provides the steering force with

more support at low speeds than at higher

ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,

and makes steering firmer when driving at

faster speeds.

Via iDrive

Servotronic settings can be configured in M

Setup.

Additional information:

Furthermore, the steering force adapts to the

driving mode to convey a firm, sporty feel or a

comfortable steering response.

M Setup, refer to page 210.

Display in the instrument cluster

Overview

When the display for M Setup is acti-

vated in the instrument cluster, the se-

lected program is displayed.

Button in the vehicle

Additional information:

Central display area, refer to page 153

Brake

Principle

The sensitivity of the brake pedal motions to

the braking response can be adjusted.

SETUP

Overview

Programs

Button in the vehicle

Program

Steering force tuning

"COMFORT" Low steering forces, good

roadway feedback.

"SPORT"

High steering forces, maxi-

mum roadway feedback.

SETUP

214

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

▷

Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.

Programs

Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which

can lead to understeering.

Program

Response characteristics

"COMFORT" Comfortable.

"SPORT" Direct.

Safety information

Warning

Selecting a program

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Using the button

Press the button and select the desired

program on the control display.

Via iDrive

Brake settings can be configured in M Setup.

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 210.

Overview

Display in the instrument cluster

When the display for M Setup is acti-

vated in the instrument cluster, the se-

lected program is displayed.

Additional information:

Central display area, refer to page 153

Dynamic Stability Control

Principle

Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehi-

cle on a steady course in critical driving situa-

tions. The drive power is reduced depending

on the situation, and wheels can be braked

individually.

Activating/deactivating Dynamic

Stability Control

General information

Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-

vated whenever drive-ready state is switched

on.

General information

The system detects the following unstable

driving conditions, for instance:

If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-

ing stability is limited when accelerating and

cornering.

215

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic

Stability Control as soon as possible.

authorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Activating/deactivating the system

Automatic program change

Dynamic Stability Control can be activated au-

tomatically by Forward Collision Mitigation de-

pending on the situation. Deactivate Forward

Collision Mitigation as necessary.

1.

Press the button to open the menu.

2. "DSC OFF"

Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-

vention, refer to page 177.

3.

Press the button again to reactivate

Dynamic Stability Control.

After deactivating Dynamic Stability Control,

the program for M xDrive can be selected di-

rectly.

M Dynamic Mode

Dynamic Stability Control settings can be con-

figured in M Setup.

Principle

M Dynamic Mode allows a ride with high longi-

tudinal and lateral acceleration but with limited

driving stability.

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 210.

Only in the absolute limit range does the sys-

tem intervene for stabilization by reducing the

engine power and by brake interventions on

the wheels. In this driving condition, additional

steering corrections may be necessary.

Displays in the instrument cluster

View when Dynamic Stability

Control is deactivated.

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment, the active

M xDrive mode is: "4WD SPORT" when M Dy-

namic Mode is activated.

Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic

Stability Control is deactivated.

You may find it useful to briefly activate the

system under the following special circumstan-

ces:

Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control is regulating the driving and

brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.

Reduce speed and modify your driving style to

the driving circumstances.

▷

When rocking the vehicle free from deep

snow or driving off from loose ground.

▷

With an increased need for dynamics or

longitudinal acceleration, for instance when

driving on a race track.

Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-

bility Control has failed or is initializing.

Driving stabilization is restricted or has

failed.

To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic

Stability Control.

If the warning light illuminates continuously,

have the vehicle checked immediately by an

216

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Safety information

Display in the instrument cluster

Icon

Description

Warning

Display active and indicator

light illuminates:

When M Dynamic Mode is activated, stabi-

lizing interventions are carried out only to a

reduced extent. There is a risk of accident,

injury, and property damage. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding

traffic closely and actively intervene where

appropriate Do not jerk the steering wheel in

response to a warning.

M Dynamic Mode is activated.

Dynamic Stability Control

warning light also flashes:

Overview

M Dynamic Mode controls the

driving and brake power.

Button in the vehicle

Indicator and warning lights il-

luminate:

The M Dynamic Mode or the

Dynamic Stability Control has

malfunctioned.

M xDrive

Dynamic Stability Control

Principle

M xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the

vehicle. The M xDrive and the Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control work together to optimize the trac-

tion and driving dynamics. M xDrive variably

distributes the drive forces to the front and rear

axles as demanded by the driving situation

and road condition.

Activate/deactivate the function

1.

Press the button to open the selec-

tion menu.

2. "MDM"

M Dynamic Mode is activated.

3.

Press the button again to reactivate

Dynamic Stability Control.

217

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

▷

When the drive-ready state is switched on:

"4WD".

Overview

Button in the vehicle

When the M Dynamic Mode is activated:

"4WD SPORT".

When Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-

vated: "4WD".

Selecting a program

General information

Changing programs in dynamic driving situa-

tions is not possible.

SETUP

Using the button

Press the button and select the desired

program on the control display.

Programs

There arethree M xDrive programs available

when the DSC Dynamic Stability Control is de-

activated.

Via iDrive

M xDrive settings can be configured in M

Setup.

Program

Distribution of driving forces

Additional information:

"4WD"

Front and rear axles.

M Setup, refer to page 210.

"4WD

Front and rear axles.

SPORT"

Display in the instrument cluster

Main component, rear axle.

"4WD

SAND"

Front and rear axles.

Icon

Description

Traction-optimized configura-

tion for driving on loose

ground.

The indicator light is illumi-

nated and 4WD appears in the

instrument cluster:

Program is activated.

If "4WD SAND" is activated, Forward Collision

Mitigation is automatically deactivated.

The indicator light is illumi-

nated and 4WD Sport appears

in the instrument cluster:

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 177.

Program is activated.

A program is activated automatically in the fol-

lowing situations:

218

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

proves driving stability and steerability. If nec-

essary, the Antilock Braking System prevents

the wheels from locking.

Icon

Description

The indicator light is illumi-

nated and 4WD Sand appears

in the instrument cluster:

Hill Descent Control can be enabled at speeds

below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Program is activated.

Speeds can be set between approx.

2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

When the vehicle is driving downhill, the sys-

tem reduces the speed to the set value, within

the physical limits.

Warning light illuminates:

The M xDrive system may not

be operational. Have the vehi-

cle checked immediately.

Hill Descent Control provides assistance when

driving in selector lever positions D, N, and R.

Display on the control display

Information on M xDrive can be selected in the

Live Vehicle menu.

Overview

The following information is displayed:

Button in the vehicle

▷

Distribution of drive torque to the wheels.

Longitudinal inclination: specified in per-

cent.

▷

Transverse inclination: specified in degrees.

Graph of wheel angle.

With navigation system: elevation for the

current position.

Additional information:

Live Vehicle, refer to page 139.

Hill Descent Control

Enabling/disabling Hill Descent

Control

Principle

Hill Descent Control is a downhill control fea-

ture that adjusts the vehicle speed on steep

downhill gradients, e.g., when driving on un-

paved roads.

Activating the system

Press the button.

The LED on the button illuminates.

Speeds between approx.

2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h

are adopted as the set speed.

General information

When the system is active, the vehicle moves

at the speed set by the driver, without the

driver having to depress the brake pedal.

While Hill Descent Control is regulating the ve-

hicle speed, the following functions are deacti-

vated:

While Hill Descent Control is adjusting the

speed, the system automatically distributes the

brake power to the individual wheels. This im-

219

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

▷

Forward Collision Mitigation.

Emergency braking function of Active Park

Distance Control.

Additional information:

▷

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to

page 177.

▷

Active Park Distance Control, refer to

page 266.

▷

Press rocker button up: Speed increases

gradually.

Deactivating the system

Press the button again.

Press rocker button up and hold: Speed in-

creases while the rocker button is pressed.

The LED on the button goes out.

Press rocker button down: Speed de-

creases gradually.

The system is automatically deacti-

vated above approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Press rocker button down and hold: Speed

decreases while the rocker button is

pressed.

Display in the instrument cluster

An icon and the selected set

speed are displayed.

Using the brake pedal

While Hill Descent Control is adjusting the

speed, the target speed set can be reduced by

depressing the brake pedal.

▷

Indicator green: Hill Descent

Control is active. The system

is actively braking the vehi-

cle.

▷

Indicator gray: Hill Descent Control is on

standby.

Malfunction

If a malfunction occurs, a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed on the instrument cluster.

Display in the Head-up display

The status of Hill Descent Control can also be

shown on the Head-up display.

Active M differential

The active M differential provides for continu-

ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-

tial depending on the driving situation. This

prevents an individual rear wheel from spin-

ning even when the Dynamic Stability Control

is turned off and in M Dynamic Mode, and thus

enables optimum traction in all driving situa-

tions.

Increasing or decreasing vehicle

speed

Using the rocker button for cruise

control

The set speed can be changed using the

cruise control rocker button on the steering

wheel.

The driver is responsible adapting his or her

driving style to the situation.

220

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Malfunction

Integral Active Steering

The warning light on the instrument

cluster illuminates.

Principle

A Check Control message is displayed.

The Integral Active Steering increases the ma-

neuverability of the vehicle and makes a more

direct steering response possible. Driving sta-

bility is also increased at high speeds.

The steering system may not be operational.

Integral Active Steering assistance may no lon-

ger be provided.

▷

Larger steering movements are required at

low speeds.

General information

Integral Active Steering combines variable

sport steering with active rear-wheel steering.

The response of the vehicle is more sensi-

tive in higher speed ranges.

The rear-wheel steering acts to increase ma-

neuverability at low speeds by turning the rear

wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the

front wheels.

Proceed cautiously and practice anticipa-

tory driving.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized

service center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned

in the same direction as the front wheels. For

instance, this results in a harmonious lane

change.

In critical driving situations, integral active

steering can stabilize the vehicle by automat-

ically steering the rear wheels, for example e.g.

when oversteering.

Setting

The system offers several different settings.

Using the settings in M setup, you can set the

system to comfortable or dynamic.

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 210.

Using snow chains

In order to guarantee free movement of the

wheels when operating with snow chains,

rear-wheel steering must be turned off when

snow chains are mounted.

Additional information:

Rear-wheel steering during operation with

snow chains, refer to page 355.

221

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and options Speed Limit Info

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

Speed Limit Info

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Principle

Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid

speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if

necessary, the Head-up display.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

General information

The camera in the area of the interior mirror

detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as

well as overhead sign posts.

Speed warning

Principle

The speed warning can be used to set a speed

limit. A warning will be issued when this speed

limit is exceeded.

Traffic signs with extra icons are considered

and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.

The traffic sign will then be either displayed

or ignored depending on the situation in the

instrument cluster and the Head-up display.

General information

The system may also show speed limits that

apply to routes that are not signposted if the

navigation system has current map data.

Another speed warning is given when the set

speed limit is exceeded again after it has drop-

ped by 3 mph/5 km/h.

For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-

rent map data for the country in which the ve-

hicle is operated must be downloaded.

Settings

The Speed Limit Warning can be activated or

deactivated. In addition, the speed limit for the

warning can be configured.

For information on the current map version

and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-

igation system chapter.

1.

Apps menu

Without map data, the system is subject to

certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with

speed limitations are detected and displayed

only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities,

highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed

limits with extra traffic signs are always dis-

played.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Speed warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

Speed limits for trailer towing will be displayed

when the trailer power socket is occupied or

trailer towing was activated via iDrive.

Depending on the equipment, an approved

maximum speed can be set up for trailer tow-

222

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

ing, which will be taken into account for the

display of speed limits.

Warning signals

Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal

sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded

or the speed limit changes. The display also

flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.

Additional information:

▷

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-

ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.

Trailer towing, refer to page 316.

Settings

Individual settings can be configured for Speed

Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is

exceeded or the permissible maximum speed

changes.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Speed Limit Assistant"

7. Select the desired setting.

System limits

Sensors

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

The system is controlled by a camera behind

the windshield.

▷

Camera, refer to page 39.

Display

Functional limitations

The system function may be limited and may

provide incorrect information in the following

situations:

Speed Limit Info

Icon

Description

▷

Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed

by objects, stickers, or paint.

Current speed limit.

Depending on the national-

market version, it is possible

to switch between the units of

measurement.

Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-

ard.

In areas that are not included in the naviga-

tion system map data.

No data on current speed limit

available.

If navigation system map data is invalid,

outdated, or unavailable.

When roads deviate from the navigation

such as due to changes in road layout.

Speed Limit Info deactivated.

223

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.

Safety information

When passing buses or trucks with traffic

signs applied to them.

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

▷

In case of electronic traffic signs.

When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-

lel road are detected.

▷

In the presence of country-specific road

signs or road layouts.

Speed control systems

Principle

The speed control systems provide support

when driving.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

General information

Depending on the equipment, the speed con-

trol systems include the following individual

systems.

Turn last active speed control sys-

tem on/off.

▷

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Select the desired speed control

system.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to

page 244.

Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-

gested speed manually.

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the individual systems are en-

hanced with additional functions.

Resume speed control systems with

the stored setting.

Speed control systems are only available in

ROAD drive mode.

Interrupt speed control systems.

Set speed.

Some functions can be operated via voice con-

trol.

Additional information:

M Mode, refer to page 212

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to

page 57.

224

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Turning on/selecting speed control

systems

Interrupting speed control systems

manually

Press the button.

1.

Turn on: press the button.

Continuing speed control systems

2.

Select: when the system is active,

press the button repeatedly until the de-

sired speed control system is displayed in

the toolbar in the instrument cluster.

Press the button.

Icon

Speed control system

Turning off speed control systems

automatically

Cruise control.

The speed control systems turn off automati-

cally when the drive-ready state is turned off.

Distance control.

Turning off speed control systems

manually

Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise Control

with Distance Control, Steering Assis-

tance with lane keeping.

Press the button.

The speed control systems are turned

off and the displays extinguish.

The activated system is shown in green.

The system is shown in white when the sys-

tem can be activated.

Adjusting speed values

Repeatedly press the rocker button on

the steering wheel up or down until the

desired value is set.

The system is grayed out if the system has

failed or if the functional requirements are not

met.

▷

Each time the rocker button is pressed

to the resistance point, the set speed in-

creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.

Interrupting speed control systems

automatically

Depending on the system, speed control

systems are interrupted automatically, for in-

stance in the following situations:

Each time the rocker button is pressed past

the resistance point, the set speed changes

by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

▷

When moving from selector lever position D

to P, N, or R.

Display in the instrument cluster

▷

While Dynamic Stability Control regulates

driving stability.

Marking on speedometer

A mark for the set speed ap-

pears on the speedometer.

▷

While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.

While M Dynamic Mode is activated.

When performing a manual braking proc-

ess.

225

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

Green marking: system is active.

Gray marking: system is interrupted.

No marking: system is switched off.

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Notifications

In addition to the respective indicator lights,

notifications are displayed for some functions.

Warning

The scope of notifications can be set.

The use of the system can lead to an in-

creased risk of accidents in the following sit-

uations, for instance:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

▷

On winding roads.

With high traffic volume.

On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet

conditions, or on a loose road surface.

6. "Notifications"

7. Select the desired setting.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-

erty damage. Only use the system if driving

at constant speed is possible.

Cruise Control

Warning

Principle

The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or

called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the

set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate

With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-

justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the set speed. The sys-

tem accelerates and brakes automatically as

needed.

General information

The system can be activated starting at

20 mph/30 km/h.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle settings, the cruise

control settings may change under certain

conditions.

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Turn last active speed control sys-

tem on/off.

Safety information

Warning

Select the desired speed control

system.

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

226

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Turning the speed control system

off/interrupting

The speed control system can be turned off or

canceled automatically or manually.

Button Function

Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-

gested speed manually.

Additional information:

Resume speed control systems with

the stored setting.

Speed control systems, refer to page 224.

Adjusting the speed

Interrupt speed control systems.

Set speed.

Store/maintain speed

Press the rocker button up or down

once while the system is stopped.

When the system is switched on, the current

speed is maintained and stored as the set

speed.

Turning on the Cruise Control

In vehicles with distance control: change the

mode of the Cruise Control to Cruise Control

without distance control.

The saved speed is shown on the speedome-

ter.

Additional information:

When the Speed Limit Assistant is not active,

the current speed can also be stored by press-

ing a button:

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

In vehicles without distance control: turn on the

Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering

wheel.

Press the button.

Changing the speed

1.

If necessary, press the button.

Repeatedly press the rocker button up

or down until the desired speed is set.

2.

If necessary, press the button re-

peatedly until the Cruise Control is selected.

If active, the displayed speed is stored

and the vehicle reaches the stored speed

when the road is clear.

Cruise control is active. The current speed is

maintained and stored as desired speed.

The maximum adjustable speed depends on

the vehicle and the set hybrid system charac-

teristic.

The indicator lights on the instrument cluster

illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is

set to the current speed.

Press rocker button to resistance point and

hold: The vehicle accelerates or decelerates

without the accelerator pedal being pressed.

The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-

bility Control activates when cruise control is

switched on.

After the rocker button is released, the vehicle

maintains the final speed achieved. Pressing

the switch beyond the resistance point causes

the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

227

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Continuing cruise control

Displays in the instrument cluster

At the stored speed

Marking on speedometer

▷

Green marking: system is ac-

tive, the marking indicates

the desired speed.

Warning

The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or

called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the

set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate

▷

Gray marking: system is in-

terrupted, the marking indi-

cates the stored speed.

▷

No marking: system is switched off.

Indicator light

An interrupted cruise control can be continued

by calling up the stored speed. The difference

between the current speed and the stored

speed should be as little as possible.

Icon

Description

Indicator light green: system is active.

Press the button with the system inter-

rupted.

Gray indicator light: the system has

been interrupted.

Cruise control is continued with the stored val-

ues.

In the following cases, the stored speed value

is deleted and cannot be called up again:

Displays in the Head-up display

Depending on the equipment, some system

information can also be displayed in the Head-

up display.

▷

When the system is switched off.

When drive-ready state is switched off.

At the current speed

System limits

Do not use Cruise Control when towing.

Press the rocker button up or down to

continue cruise control at the current

speed.

Distance control

Speed Limit Assistant: at the

suggested speed

Principle

With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-

cle driving ahead can be adjusted in addition to

the Cruise Control.

When a speed is suggested, press the

button to accept the Cruise Control at

the suggested speed.

General information

The system maintains the set speed on clear

roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-

matically.

228

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system

adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set

distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.

The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-

uation allows.

▷

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

turn the front wheels in the direction of

the curb.

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,

also secure the vehicle, for instance with

a wheel chock.

The distance can be adjusted at several levels.

For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-

tive speed.

Warning

If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-

still and then drives off again within a brief pe-

riod, the system is able to detect this within the

given system limits.

The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or

called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the

set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate

Otherwise, drive off independently such as by

stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-

ing the button for the speed setting on the

steering wheel.

Safety information

Warning

Risk of accident is greater when there is a

high speed differential to other vehicles, for

instance in the following situations:

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

▷

When approaching a slowly moving ve-

hicle at speed.

Vehicle suddenly swerving into own

lane.

When approaching stationary vehicles at

speed.

There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively

intervene where appropriate

Warning

Overview

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and

possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,

injury, and property damage. Before leaving

the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling

away.

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Turn last active speed control sys-

tem on/off.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured

against rolling away, follow the following:

▷

Set the parking brake.

Select the desired speed control

system.

Automatic transmission: Make sure that

selector lever position P is engaged.

229

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Cruise Control with Distance Control is active.

The current speed is maintained and stored as

desired speed.

Button Function

Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-

gested speed manually.

The selected distance to a vehicle driving

ahead is maintained.

The indicator lights on the instrument cluster

illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is

set to the current speed.

Resume speed control systems with

the stored setting.

Interrupt speed control systems.

Set speed.

The driving mode changes or Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control activates when Distance Control is

switched on.

Adjusting the speed

The speed can be set using the rocker button

on the steering wheel.

Sensors

Additional information:

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

▷

Camera behind the windshield.

Front radar sensor.

Interrupting Cruise Control with

Distance Control automatically

The system is stopped automatically in the fol-

lowing situations, for example:

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

▷

When performing a manual braking proc-

ess.

Application range

The system is best used on well-maintained

roads.

▷

Selector lever position D is disengaged.

While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.

While M Dynamic Mode is activated.

The maximum speed that can be set is limited

and depends, for example, on the vehicle and

the vehicle equipment.

While Dynamic Stability Control regulates

driving stability.

The system can also be activated when sta-

tionary.

▷

Driver's seat belt and driver's door are

opened.

Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control

when towing.

The system has not detected objects for

an extended period, for instance on a

road with very little traffic without curb or

shoulder markings.

Turning on Cruise Control with

Distance Control

▷

The detection range of the radar is im-

paired, for instance by contamination or

heavy precipitation.

1.

If necessary, press the button.

After a longer stationary period when the

vehicle has been braked to a stop by the

system.

2.

If necessary, press the button re-

peatedly until distance control is selected.

230

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

Pressing the accelerator pedal.

Turning the speed control system

off/interrupting

The speed control system can be turned off or

canceled automatically or manually.

Press the rocker button on the left

side of the steering wheel.

Additional information:

Speed control systems, refer to page 224.

▷

Press the button on the left side of

the steering wheel.

Continuing cruise control while

driving

Press the button on the left side of

the steering wheel.

Warning

Distance

The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or

called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the

set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the

system limits, deceleration can be late. There

is a risk of accidents and risk of property

damage. Be aware of the surrounding traffic

situation at all times. Adjust the distance to

the traffic and weather conditions and main-

tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly

by braking.

An interrupted cruise control can be continued

by calling up the stored speed. The difference

between the current speed and the stored

speed should be as little as possible.

Additional information:

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

Continuing cruise control while

vehicle is stationary

In certain situations, this system requires the

driver to confirm their intention to drive off.

Adjusting the distance

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

The displays show the following:

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

The mark on the speedometer

illuminates gray.

6. "Distance control"

7. "Distance"

The indicator light illuminates green.

8. Select the desired setting.

Automatic adaptation of the distance

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version: the system can be set so that

the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-

Cruise control can be continued as follows:

231

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-

tem analyzes the traffic situation and ambient

conditions, e.g., poor visibility.

Displays in the instrument cluster

General information

1.

Apps menu

Depending on the equipment version, the dis-

plays in the instrument cluster may vary.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

Marking on speedometer

▷

Green marking: system is ac-

tive, the marking indicates

the desired speed.

6. "Distance control"

7. "Situational distance control"

▷

Gray marking: system is in-

terrupted, the marking indi-

cates the stored speed.

Changing between Cruise Control

with/without Distance Control

▷

No marking: system is switched off.

Safety information

Indicator lights and warning lights

Icon

Description

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driv-

ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the

stored speed. There is a risk of accident,

injury, and property damage. Adjust the set

speed to the traffic conditions and brake as

needed.

White indicator light:

No Distance Control because acceler-

ator pedal is being pressed.

Indicator light illuminates green:

Vehicle has been detected ahead of

you.

The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle

has been detected ahead of you.

Changing over the Cruise Control mode

Turning Cruise Control without distance control

on or off:

Indicator light flashes green:

Preceding vehicle has driven off.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Distance control"

7. "Switch to Cruise Control"

The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.

232

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

Distance too short.

Speed greater than approx.

40 mph/70 km/h.

Icon

Description

Indicator light illuminates gray:

The system is interrupted.

Indicator light flashes gray:

System limits

Conditions are not adequate for the

system to work.

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

The system was deactivated but ap-

plies the brakes until you actively

resume control by pressing on the

brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

▷

Cameras, refer to page 39.

Radar sensors, refer to page 40.

Detection range

Warning light flashes red and acous-

tic signal sounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneu-

ver, if necessary.

Assisted View

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, information for the system is

displayed in the Assisted View in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

Additional information:

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

The detection capability of the system and the

automatic braking performance are limited.

Displays in the Head-up display

For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be

detected.

Set speed

Depending on the equipment, some system

information can also be displayed in the Head-

up display.

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate in the follow-

ing situations:

Distance information

▷

For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving

road users.

The icon is displayed when the dis-

tance from the vehicle traveling ahead

is too short.

▷

For cross traffic.

For oncoming traffic.

The distance information is active in the fol-

lowing situations:

▷

Cruise Control with Distance Control

switched off.

▷

Display in the Head-up display selected.

Head-up display, refer to page 140.

233

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Merging vehicles

When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due

to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-

erates you may compensate for it by briefly

accelerating. After releasing the accelerator

pedal the system is reactivated and controls

speed independently.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

merges into your lane, the system may not be

able to automatically restore the selected dis-

tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-

lected distance in certain situations, including if

you are driving significantly faster than vehicles

driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly

approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving

ahead of you is reliably detected, the system

requests that the driver intervene by braking

and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.

Driving off

In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off

automatically; for example:

▷

On steep uphill grades.

In front of bumps in the road.

With a heavy trailer.

Cornering

In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

Weather

The following restrictions can occur under un-

favorable weather or light conditions:

▷

Poorer vehicle detection.

Short-term interruptions for vehicles that

are already recognized.

When the set speed is too high for a curve,

the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves

may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a

curve at an appropriate speed.

Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-

rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-

vene actively, for instance by braking, steering

or making an evasive maneuver.

The system has a limited detection range. Sit-

uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-

cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be

detected very late.

Assisted Driving Mode

Principle

Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance

Control with Steering Assistance and lane

234

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

keeping. The system assists the driver in keep-

Overview

ing the vehicle within the lane. For this pur-

pose, the system executes supporting steering

movements, for instance when cornering.

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

General information

Depending on the speed, the system orients

itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-

cles in front.

Turn last active speed control sys-

tem on/off.

Select the desired speed control

system.

Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether

the steering wheel is being touched.

If a lane boundary is crossed, the system is-

sues a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.

The steering wheel vibration intensity can be

adjusted.

Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-

gested speed manually.

Resume speed control systems with

the stored setting.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

national-market version, the Driver Attention

Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the

driver's attention.

Interrupt speed control systems.

Set speed.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

▷

Camera behind the windshield.

Front radar sensor.

Depending on the equipment:

Radar sensors, side, front.

Depending on the equipment:

Radar sensors, side, rear.

Sensors in steering wheel.

▷

The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts

also apply.

▷

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

national-market version: Driver Attention

Camera

Additional information:

▷

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

Additional information:

▷

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 209.

235

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

equipment, the side-collision warning are ac-

tive.

Functional requirements

▷

Depending on the equipment: speed below

130 mph/210 km/h or 110 mph/180 km/h.

Stopping Assisted Driving Mode

automatically

The system interrupts the supporting steering

movements automatically, for example in the

following situations:

▷

Sufficient lane width.

Hands on the steering wheel rim.

Sufficiently wide curve radius.

Drive in the center of the lane.

The sensor system calibration process is

complete.

▷

Depending on the equipment: at a

speed above 130 mph/210 km/h or

110 mph/180 km/h.

▷

Distance control is active.

▷

After releasing the steering wheel.

With strong steering intervention.

When leaving own lane.

Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.

Forward Collision Mitigation is active.

Depending on the equipment:

Side-collision warning is active.

When the turn signal is switched on or, de-

pending on the vehicle equipment, when

the driver turns the steering wheel while the

turn signal is switched on.

▷

With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-

trol display that you are using a trailer or

rear carrier, respectively.

▷

When the lane is too narrow.

Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to

page 318.

If a lane boundary is not detected and there

is no vehicle driving in front.

▷

The Cruise Control with Distance Control is

interrupted.

Switching on Assisted Driving Mode

The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-

tened.

1.

If necessary, press the button.

Indicator light illuminates gray.

2.

If necessary, press the button re-

peatedly until Assisted Driving Mode is se-

lected.

The system is on standby and does not

manipulate steering movements.

System activates automatically as soon as all

function conditions are fulfilled.

Indicator light illuminates gray.

The system is on standby and does not

manipulate steering movements.

System activates automatically as soon as all

function conditions are fulfilled.

The indicator light illuminates green.

The system is active and helps to keep

the vehicle in the lane.

When the system is switched on, the Forward

Collision Mitigation and, depending on the

236

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon

Description

Warning light illuminates yellow:

Icon

Description

Hands are not grasping the steering

wheel. The system is still active.

Indicator light illuminates gray:

The system is ready.

Grab the steering wheel with your

hands.

Indicator light illuminates green:

The system is activated.

Warning light illuminates red, acous-

tic signal sounds:

The system supports the driver in

keeping the vehicle within the lane.

The hands are not on the steering

wheel or, depending on the vehicle

equipment and national-market ver-

sion, the driver's line of sight is not di-

rected at the surrounding traffic. Sys-

tem interruption is imminent.

Warning light flashes yellow and

steering wheel vibrates:

A lane boundary has been crossed.

Warning light illuminates yellow and

acoustic signal sounds:

The system reduces the speed to a

standstill if applicable.

System interruption is imminent.

It is possible that the system will

not execute any supporting steering

movements.

Warning light flashes red and acous-

tic signal sounds:

The system is switched off or will be

interrupted very soon.

Immediately grasp the steering wheel

with your hands and pay attention to

the surrounding traffic.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-

tional-market version, a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed if the Driver Attention Cam-

era detects that the driver is inattentive.

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, information for the system is

displayed in the Assisted View in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

Additional information:

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

237

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Displays on the steering wheel

System limits

General information

The system cannot be activated or meaning-

fully used in certain situations, e.g., when tow-

ing a trailer.

Safety information

Warning

Similar to the instrument cluster views, the two

LEDs above the keypads illuminate.

Because of system limitations, this system

may either not respond, or respond too late,

incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk

of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-

formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding

the scope of the system’s operation and limi-

tations.

The steering wheel displays can be turned on/

off.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

6. "Light elements"

The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts

also apply.

Additional information:

7. Select the desired setting.

▷

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

Displays in the Head-up display

Depending on the equipment, the system in-

formation can also be displayed in the Head-

up display.

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

▷

Cameras, refer to page 39.

Radar sensors, refer to page 40.

Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 209.

Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration

1.

Apps menu

Hands on the steering wheel

The sensors cannot detect hand-steering

wheel contact in the following situations:

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

6. "Vibration intensity"

7. Select the desired setting.

▷

Driving with gloves.

Protective covers on the steering wheel.

Weather

The following restrictions can occur under un-

favorable weather or light conditions:

This setting is applied to all collision warning

systems.

238

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane

boundaries.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Functional requirements

Short-term interruptions in case of already

detected vehicles and lane boundaries.

▷

The functional requirements for Assisted

Driving Mode have been met.

Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-

rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-

vene actively, for instance by braking, steering

or making an evasive maneuver.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

▷

Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-

clists and with physical barriers to oncom-

ing traffic such as crash barriers.

A vehicle has been detected at a sufficient

distance behind your own vehicle since be-

ginning the drive.

Lane Change Assistant

Principle

The Lane Change Assistant helps when

changing lanes on multi-lane roads.

▷

Crossable lane boundaries are detected.

Maximum speed approx.

110 mph/180 km/h.

Lane changes can be triggered by operating

the turn signal lever.

▷

The minimum speed is country-specific.

With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-

trol display that you are using a trailer or

rear carrier, respectively.

General information

The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode

sensors.

Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to

page 318.

Safety information

Turning on/turning off Lane Change

Assistant

Warning

1.

Apps menu

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Assisted Driving"

7. "Lane Change Assistant"

Changing lanes

1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits

changing lanes.

Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and

the use of this function may be prohibited or

limited. Before use, check federal, state, and

local laws.

2. Start the lane change.

The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.

Additional information:

239

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

To initiate the lane change, press the

turn signal lever in the desired direction

to the resistance point.

Additional information:

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

▷

Depending on the vehicle equipment,

the turn signal lever can also be pressed

beyond the resistance point.

Automatic Lane Change

Assistant

After a short time, Lane Change Assistant ini-

tiates a lane change.

Principle

The Automatic Lane Change Assistant pro-

vides assistance when changing lanes and

passing on multi-lane roads.

After the lane change, the system helps keep

the vehicle in the new lane.

Canceling a lane change

The lane change can be canceled by steering

movement into the opposite direction or by op-

erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.

Depending on the speed and traffic situation,

the Lane Change Assistant can perform an au-

tomatic lane change.

If the Automatic Lane Change Assistant de-

tects an opportunity to change lanes, a lane

change recommendation is displayed on the

instrument cluster.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon

Description

There is an opportunity to change lanes if, for

example, there is a sufficiently large gap in the

adjacent lane when a preceding vehicle in the

same lane is moving slowly.

Steering wheel icon and lane change

arrow icon are green:

The system performs a lane change

in the arrow direction.

After the driver checks the adjacent lane, the

turn signal switches on automatically and the

speed is adjusted as necessary. The Auto-

matic Lane Change Assistant then changes

lane into the adjacent lane.

Steering wheel icon is green and line

for lane marking on respective side is

gray:

The system detected the lane change

request. Lane change not currently

possible.

The system does not change lanes if it detects

that the driver has not looked to check or if the

traffic situation changes.

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, information for the system is

displayed in the Assisted View in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

General information

The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode

sensors.

Additional information:

Safety information

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

Warning

System limits

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system

apply.

240

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

▷

Depending on vehicle equipment and na-

tional-market version: Route guidance is

activated on the navigation system. The

function is not available when using nav-

igation software via Apple CarPlay or

Android Auto.

▷

With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-

trol display that you are using a trailer or

rear carrier, respectively.

Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and

the use of this function may be prohibited or

limited. Before use, check federal, state, and

local laws.

Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to

page 318.

In addition, the information on Assisted Driving

Mode and Assisted Driving Mode Plus applies.

Turning the Automatic Lane

Change Assistant on/off

1.

Additional information:

▷

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Apps menu

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to

page 244.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

Functional requirements

▷

The functional requirements for Assisted

Driving Mode or Assisted Driving Mode

Plus have been met.

6. "Assisted Driving"

7. "Active Lane Change": Lane changes can

be done automatically depending on na-

tional-market version.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to

page 244.

Changing lanes

▷

Assisted Driving Mode or Assisted Driving

Mode Plus is activated.

1.

The Automatic Lane Change Assis-

tant suggests a lane change. A signal tone

sounds.

Driving on a highway-like road without pe-

destrians or cyclists and with physical barri-

ers to oncoming traffic, e.g., guard rails.

2. Trigger the lane change by checking the

adjacent lane.

▷

The Driver Attention Camera detects the

driver’s line of sight.

After a short time, the Automatic Lane

Change Assistant initiates a lane change.

This system detects the traffic situation

clearly.

Cancel the lane change manually, e.g., by

countersteering, in critical situations.

The traffic situation in the adjacent lane

permits a lane change.

If the system cannot perform a lane change,

a corresponding message is displayed on the

instrument cluster.

No lane change was performed immedi-

ately before the current situation.

▷

Crossable lane boundaries are detected.

After the lane change, the system helps keep

the vehicle in the new lane.

Maximum speed approx.

110 mph/180 km/h.

▷

The minimum speed is country-specific.

241

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

reach a destination. A notice is also displayed

Canceling a lane change

The lane change can be canceled by steering

movement into the opposite direction or by op-

erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.

on the instrument cluster. A slight jolt can also

be felt on the steering wheel, depending on

national-market version and settings.

General information

The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode

sensors.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon

Description

Suggestion for a possible lane

change. A signal tone sounds.

Safety information

A green checkmark on the icon indi-

cates that the function is active.

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Steering wheel icon and lane change

arrow icon are green:

The system performs a lane change

in the arrow direction.

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, information for the system is

displayed in the Assisted View in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

Additional information:

The Cruise Control, Distance Control, and As-

sisted Driving alerts also apply.

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

Additional information:

System limits

The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode and

Assisted Driving Mode Plus systems and the

Driver Attention Camera apply.

▷

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Additional information:

Functional requirements

▷

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

▷

Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-

tivated.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to

page 244.

▷

Driving on a highway or highway-like road.

▷

Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 209.

A situation-dependent minimum speed has

been reached.

Lane change with active

guidance

▷

The system detects a sufficiently large gap

in traffic in the adjacent lane.

A crossable lane boundary on the side of

the desired lane change is detected.

Principle

Destination guidance is active on the navi-

gation system.

Lane change with active guidance assists the

driver when lane changes are necessary to

242

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

The function is not available when using

navigation software via Apple CarPlay or

Android Auto.

tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering

wheel.

To change lanes, follow the instructions on the

instrument cluster.

▷

The function must be available in the coun-

try in which the vehicle is driven.

The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-

ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-

ing attention to the surrounding traffic.

1.

The system detects a suitable gap

in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. A

green checkmark is displayed on the lane

change icon on the instrument cluster. The

system prepares for the lane change.

▷

With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-

trol display that you are using a trailer or

rear carrier, respectively.

2. When a suitable gap is detected, the speed

is adapted so that the vehicle remains level

with the opening.

Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to

page 318.

3. A Check Control message indicates a lane

change suggestion.

Switching lane change on/off with

active destination guidance

4. When the traffic situation permits a lane

change, the driver can steer the vehicle into

the next lane.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

For vehicles equipped with Lane Change

Assistant: the Lane Change Assistant can

be started, e.g., by operating the turn signal

after the Check Control message appears.

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Route and intersection assistant"

7. "Lane Guiding with Navigation"

For vehicles equipped with Automatic Lane

Change Assistant: Once the Check Control

message appears, a lane change can be

started by checking the adjacent lane.

Switching the steering wheel jerk

on/off

You can switch the steering wheel jerk assis-

tance on/off.

5. If necessary, the system automatically

starts additional lane changes.

Display in the instrument cluster

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Icon

Function

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

Indicates a necessary lane change.

The icon varies depending on the

traffic situation.

6. "Route and intersection assistant"

7. "Steering wheel impulse"

A green checkmark on the icon indi-

cates that the function is active.

A red cross on the icon indicates that

the system cannot assist with the

lane change.

Changing lanes

If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-

igation destination, a corresponding notice is

displayed on the instrument cluster. In addi-

243

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the traffic situation is displayed

in Assisted View on the instrument cluster.

the duration of availability for Assisted Driving

Mode Plus will be available prior to and at

the time of vehicle sale. Assisted Driving Mode

Plus may be terminated earlier due to techni-

cal or legal requirements. Further information

about the availability of Assisted Driving Mode

Plus can be requested from an authorized

service center.

Additional information:

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

System limits

The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-

trol, and Assisted Driving Mode systems and

Driver Attention Camera apply.

Safety information

Additional information:

Warning

▷

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 209.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

Principle

Assisted Driving Mode Plus provides assis-

tance with guiding the vehicle on select high-

ways.

Warning

The system increases driving comfort in suita-

ble driving situations.

This system is only intended for use on

roads with structural separation from oncom-

ing traffic, e.g., highways. Because of the

system limits, the system can also remain ac-

tive on roads without structural separations

and may not react as expected. There is

a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-

age. Deactivate the system if it is enabled on

roads without structural separations.

Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether

the steering wheel is being touched.

Different versions of this function are available

depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version.

▷

Version for speeds up to approx.

40 mph/60 km/h, e.g., traffic jam.

▷

Version for speeds up to approx.

85 mph/135 km/h.

Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and

the use of this function may be prohibited or

limited. Before use, check federal, state, and

local laws.

General information

For versions up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the fol-

lowing applies:

The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.

Additional information:

Assisted Driving Mode Plus will be active at the

time of vehicle delivery and will only be avail-

able for a limited period. Information about

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

244

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

This function must be available on the road

on which the vehicle is driving.

Overview

Sensors

Antennas located in the roof must not be

covered, e.g., by roof loads or snow.

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-

ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-

ing attention to the surrounding traffic.

▷

Camera behind the windshield.

Front radar sensor.

▷

With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-

trol display that you are using a trailer or

rear carrier, respectively.

Side radar sensors, front.

Side radar sensors, rear.

The sensors in the steering wheel.

Driver Attention Camera.

Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to

page 318.

For the version up to 40 mph/60 km/h, the fol-

lowing additional functional requirements ap-

ply:

The version up to 85 mph/135 km/h addition-

ally uses the following sensors:

▷

Front camera.

▷

A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.

Exterior mirror cameras.

Rearview camera.

For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the

following additional functional requirements

apply:

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

▷

Assisted Driving Mode Plus is enabled in

the vehicle.

Functional requirements

The following functional requirements apply to

Assisted Driving Mode Plus:

▷

The navigation data must be up to date.

Vehicle speed is less than approx.

85 mph/135 km/h.

▷

Assisted Driving Mode Plus must be avail-

able in the country in which the vehicle is

driven.

▷

The systems in the vehicle, e.g., the At-

tention Assistant and the Driver Attention

Camera recognize that the driver is rested.

▷

The functional requirements for Assisted

Driving Mode have been met.

Assisted Driving Mode is active and the

LED displays on the steering wheel are

switched on.

Switching Assisted Driving Mode

Plus on/off

1.

Apps menu

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

2. "Vehicle"

▷

Driving on a highway-like road without pe-

destrians or cyclists and with physical barri-

ers to oncoming traffic, e.g., guard rails.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

▷

Lane boundaries are detected.

Sufficient lane width.

6. "Assisted Driving"

7. "Assisted Driving Plus"

Sufficiently wide curve radius.

The navigation system must clearly identify

the road and vehicle position.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically

offered when Assisted Driving Mode is active

245

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

and all functional requirements for Assisted

Driving Mode Plus have been met.

Displays on the steering wheel

To activate this function, remove your hands

from the steering wheel. Remain ready to steer

and brake at all times.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is shown in green.

Two green LED lights are illuminated on the

steering wheel.

The system begins to assist the driver with

vehicle control.

The two LEDs above the keypads illuminate

depending on the situation.

When the system is switched on, the following

functions are enabled:

▷

Green: the system is active.

Yellow: system will be interrupted.

Grab the steering wheel with your hands.

Red: system will be deactivated.

▷

Forward Collision Mitigation.

Side collision mitigation.

▷

For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h:

Some speed control systems, e.g., adjust-

ing speed to course of road.

Grab the steering wheel immediately with

your hands.

Additional information:

Displays in the instrument cluster

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Icon

Description

Displays in the Head-up display

Depending on the equipment, the system in-

formation can also be displayed in the Head-

up display.

Indicator light green: system is active.

Indicator light is white: System can be

used.

Navigation system displays

For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, roads

on which Assisted Driving Mode Plus supports

vehicle control can be displayed on the naviga-

tion system.

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, information for the system is

displayed in the Assisted View in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

1.

Navigation menu

Additional information:

2. "Suggestions"

3. "Availability"

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

System limits

The system limits of the following systems ap-

ply:

▷

Assisted Driving Mode.

Driver Attention Camera.

246

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

For version up to 85 mph/135 km/h: Fati-

gue Alert

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors of the vehicle.

Additional information:

▷

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 209.

Fatigue alert, refer to page 208.

Warning

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or

called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the

set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene

where appropriate

Speed Limit Assistant

Principle

Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the

speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-

plied.

Overview

General information

Buttons on the steering wheel

When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed

Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,

this new speed value can be applied for the

following systems:

Button Function

Accept suggested speed manually.

▷

Cruise control.

Distance control.

Set speed, refer to page 224.

Assisted Driving Mode.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus.

The speed value is suggested as the new de-

sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed

value, the corresponding system must be acti-

vated.

Turning Speed Limit Assistant

on/off

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Depending on the equipment, destination sys-

tem and national-market version, the value

can be applied automatically.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

Safety information

6. "Speed Limit Assistant"

7. "Speed limits"

Warning

8. Select the desired setting:

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

247

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

"Adjust automatically": depending on

the equipment, detected speed limits

are applied automatically.

After an automatic adoption, the button

can be pressed to switch back to the

last set value of the desired speed.

▷

"Adjust manually": detected speed limits

can be applied manually.

Manual adoption

A detected speed limit can be applied man-

ually to the active speed control system.

"Show current limit": current speed lim-

its are displayed without being applied

in the instrument cluster.

When the SET icon is displayed, press

the button.

▷

"Off": depending on the national-market

version, Speed Limit Info and Speed

Limit Assistant will be turned off.

If necessary, other anticipatory comfort

functions will be turned off.

Speed adjustment

Principle

Additional information:

It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is

applied exactly or with a tolerance.

Speed Limit Info, refer to page 222.

Displays in the instrument cluster

A message is displayed in the instrument clus-

ter when the system and a speed control sys-

tem are activated.

General information

A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an

additional speed adaptation for speed limits up

to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.

Icon

Function

The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-

its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or

deactivated.

Detected change of a speed limit with

immediate effect.

Depending on the national-market

version, it is possible to switch be-

tween the units of measurement.

Setting the speed adjustment

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Indicator light illuminates green: the

detected speed limit can be applied

with the SET button.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

After it has been applied, a green

checkmark is displayed.

6. "Speed Limit Assistant"

7. Select the desired setting:

Automatic adoption

▷

"Adjust speed limits": set the tolerance

for speed adjustments, which applies to

all speed limits.

"Adjust automatically": Distance Control auto-

matically adopts any detected speed limits

when driving on roads with barriers separating

traffic in opposing directions.

▷

"2nd adjustment up to": activate or de-

activate additional speed adaptation.

It may not be possible to use this function

when driving with a trailer.

"Adjust speed limits": with activated

additional speed adjustment, set the

248

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

tolerance for speed limits up to

40 mph/60 km/h.

Safety information

Warning

System limits

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed

Limit Info system.

Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.

Cruise Control without Distance Control: for

system related reasons, the speed limits can-

not be applied automatically.

With trailer hitch: speed values to be adopted

are limited to the value set on the control dis-

play for trailer operation.

Additional information:

The Cruise Control, Distance Control, Assisted

Driving Mode, and Speed Limit Assist alerts

also apply.

▷

System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer to

page 223.

System limits of the sensors, refer to

page 39.

Additional information:

▷

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to

page 318.

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 247.

Adapting the speed to the

route

Functional requirements

▷

Cruise Control and distance control are acti-

vated.

Principle

▷

Driving on a highway or highway-like road.

The system can be configured so that with

active distance control, the vehicle adapts the

speed automatically to the route.

With navigation system: guidance is acti-

vated.

The use of navigation software via Apple

CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-

tional limitations, for instance deviations

with navigation instructions.

For instance, the speed will be reduced in the

following situations as necessary:

▷

Before making turns.

Before a roundabout.

Before a curve.

▷

The function must be available in the coun-

try in which the vehicle is driven.

In front of an exit ramp on highways or

highway-like roads.

With trailer hitch: You must set on the con-

trol display that you are using a trailer or

rear carrier, respectively.

Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to

page 318.

249

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-

termined by the navigation system.

Adapting speed automatically to

route

On wintry roads.

1.

Apps menu

Additionally, the limits for Cruise Control, Dis-

tance Control, Assisted Driving, and Speed

Limit Assist systems apply.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

Additional information:

▷

Cruise control, refer to page 226.

6. "Route and intersection assistant"

7. "Automatically adjust speed to route"

Distance Control, refer to page 228.

Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 234.

Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 247.

Adjusting the cornering speed

The cornering speed can be adjusted depend-

ing on national-market version.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Route and intersection assistant"

7. "Cornering speed"

8. Select the desired setting.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, information for the system is

displayed in the Assisted View in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

Additional information:

Assisted View, refer to page 155.

System limits

Depending on the national-market version or

country in which the vehicle is currently being

driven, the function may not be available.

The system does not react or reacts to a lim-

ited extent to the route ahead in the following

situations:

250

Parking

CONTROLS

Parking

▷

Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to

page 268.

Vehicle features and options

▷

Back-up Assistant, refer to page 273.

Trailer Assistant, refer to page 320.

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Safety information

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Parking assistance systems

General information

The parking assistance systems include differ-

ent individual systems. The individual systems

help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or

reversing by providing various assistance func-

tions, sensors, and camera views.

Additional information:

▷

Rearview camera, refer to page 256.

Overview

Semi-automatic camera perspective, refer

to page 257.

Button in the vehicle

▷

Automatic camera perspective, refer to

page 257.

▷

Side view, refer to page 258.

3D view, refer to page 258.

Trailer hitch view, refer to page 259.

Car wash view, refer to page 259.

Panorama View, refer to page 260.

Automatic activation of panorama view, re-

fer to page 260.

Park assistance button

Panorama View

▷

Door opening angle, refer to page 261.

Remote 3D View, refer to page 262.

Park Distance Control, refer to page 263.

Active Park Distance Control, refer to

page 266.

▷

Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 267.

251

Parking

CONTROLS

systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse

your vehicle.

Sensors

The parking assistance systems are controlled

by the following sensors:

General information

Depending on the equipment, one or more

cameras capture the area from different se-

lectable perspectives.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Front camera.

Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-

ings or a part of it is depicted.

Top view cameras.

Rearview camera.

Depending on the national-market version, ei-

ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-

era perspective is displayed.

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

Turning display on/off

Operating concept

The camera-based individual systems are op-

erated with the function bars on the control

display. The camera views can be viewed by

selecting the appropriate icon.

General information

The parking assistance systems view switches

off automatically when driving forwards or if a

certain distance or speed is exceeded.

In the Parking menu, some parking assistance

systems can be configured individually.

With reverse gear

Some parking assistance systems can be

started by voice control as needed, e.g., driving

in/out of a parking space with the Automatic

Parking Assistant.

When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-

play is automatically switched on if selector

lever position R is engaged.

Additional information:

With the Park Assist key

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to

page 57.

Press the button.

Calling up Park menu

Via iDrive

1.

Apps menu

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Parking"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Parking"

Display in the instrument cluster

The instrument cluster shows displays of some

parking assistance systems such as Park Dis-

tance Control or Automatic Parking Assistant.

6. Select the desired settings.

Display

Principle

With the Park Distance Control display and

various camera views, the parking assistance

252

Parking

CONTROLS

Parking view

1

Status of parking assistance systems

Assisted View

2

3

1

Toolbar, left

Selection menu

2

3

4

5

6

7

Camera image

Selection window

Display on the control display

Automatic camera perspective

Semi-automatic camera perspective

Side view

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment and on the

activated parking assistance system, the con-

trol display will vary.

Toolbar, right

Toolbar, left

Assistance view

Different views and settings can be selected

via the left toolbar depending on the equip-

ment:

▷

"Parking view"

Depending on vehicle equipment, camera

views or the Park Distance Control view are

displayed.

▷

"Assist view"

A stylized top view of the vehicle is dis-

played.

1

Toolbar, left

▷

"Panorama view"

The cross traffic view is displayed.

"More"

2

3

4

Camera image

Vehicle top view

Toolbar, right

▷

"3D view"

A three-dimensional view of the vehicle

is displayed.

"Trailer coupling view"

The view shows the zoom onto the

trailer hitch.

"Car wash view"

253

Parking

CONTROLS

Your own lane can be displayed to make

it easier to drive into a car wash.

Icon

Meaning

No search for parking assistance

system offers.

▷

"Settings"

Settings can be entered in the Park

menu.

No other parking assistance sys-

tems available.

Parking assistance systems have

failed.

Toolbar, right

The Parking Assistant functions are displayed

in the right toolbar.

Search for parking assistance sys-

tem offers is active.

▷

Status of the parking assistance systems.

Available parking methods of the Automatic

Parking Assistant.

White: an available maneuver is se-

lected but is not being performed.

Functional requirements have not

been met or the functions transfer

has been completed.

▷

Functions of the Back-up Assistant.

Trailer Assistant functions.

Additional information in case of malfunc-

tions.

Green: parking assistance system is

active. Functions are controlled de-

pending on the system activated.

Status of parking assistance

systems

Additional displays

The status of parking assistance systems is

indicated by icons on the toolbar on the right of

the control display, in the status area on the in-

strument cluster, and on the Head-up display,

depending on vehicle equipment. In addition

to this icon, text also appears on the control

display.

General information

Additional displays can be shown in the cam-

era image of the display of the parking assis-

tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make

parking and maneuvering easier.

Several additional displays can be active at the

same time.

The following parking assistance systems are

displayed:

▷

Automatic Parking Assistant.

Back-up Assistant.

Turning additional displays on/off

1.

Apps menu

Trailer Assistant.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Parking"

6. Select the desired setting.

254

Parking

CONTROLS

Using parking aid lines

Parking aid lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning

circle line leads to within the limits of the

parking space.

Pathway lines

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where

the green pathway line covers the corre-

sponding turning circle line.

Obstacle marking

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space

required when parking and maneuvering on

level roads.

Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind

the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.

The pathway lines are continuously adjusted

to the steering movements depending on the

steering-wheel angle.

Obstacles are detected by the sensors.

The obstacles detected by the Park Distance

Control are shown by marks in the camera im-

age.

Turning circle lines

Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in

green, yellow and red indicate the distances.

Functional limitations

The system can be used only to a limited ex-

tent in the following situations:

▷

With a door open.

With open cargo area.

With exterior mirrors folded in.

Turning circle lines can only be superimposed

on the camera image together with pathway

lines.

Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the

camera image identify areas that are currently

not shown such as an open door.

The lines show the course of the smallest pos-

sible turning circle on a level road.

Only one turning circle line is displayed after

the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-

gle.

255

Parking

CONTROLS

System limits

Rearview camera

Safety information

Principle

The rearview camera helps when reverse

parking and maneuvering. The area behind the

vehicle is shown on the control display.

Warning

Because of system limitations, this system

may either not respond, or respond too late,

incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk

of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-

formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding

the scope of the system’s operation and limi-

tations.

Additional views can be shown on the display,

e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.

General information

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Functional requirements

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

▷

The cargo area is fully closed.

▷

The camera area is clean and clear.

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.

Turning the rearview camera on/off

Field of view

Turning the camera view on

automatically

Because of the camera angle, the areas under

the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.

When drive-ready state is switched on, the

rearview camera is automatically switched on

if selector lever position R is engaged.

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding

objects such as ledges may not be detected by

the system.

Turning the camera view off

automatically

The rearview camera turns off automatically

when driving forward or when a certain dis-

tance or speed is exceeded.

Objects shown on the control display may be

closer than they appear. Do not estimate the

distance to the objects on the control display.

The camera's detection range can be limited

by protruding cargo, a rear carrier, or a trailer.

Turning the camera view on/off

manually

Malfunction

A camera failure is displayed on the control

display.

1.

Press the button.

The malfunctioning camera's detection range

is shown by the shaded area on the control

display.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Depending on vehicle equipment: The

icon in the selection window is selected au-

tomatically.

256

Parking

CONTROLS

To exit rearview camera view, select an-

other camera view in the selection window

or press the button again.

General information

As soon as obstacles are detected, the view

changes to a fixed display of the area in front

of or behind the bumper, or switches to side

Park Distance Control as necessary.

Deactivated rearview camera

When the rearview camera is deactivated, for

instance when the cargo area is open, the

camera image is displayed with gray shading.

When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic

camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and

the system uses a semi-automatic camera

perspective to the rear. If necessary, select the

automatic camera perspective when reverse

gear is engaged. The automatic camera per-

spective will then be maintained for the current

parking operation.

Semi-automatic camera

perspective

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Principle

Depending on the parking direction and en-

gaged selector lever position, a fixed camera

perspective is displayed with the areas in front

of or behind the vehicle.

Turning the automatic camera

perspective on/off

Turning the camera view on/off

automatically

When the parking assistance systems' display

is turned on, automatic camera perspective is

selected automatically.

General information

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Turning the semi-automatic camera

perspective on/off

The icon in the selection window is selected

automatically.

To exit the steering-dependent camera view,

select another camera view in the selection

window.

1.

Press the button.

2.

Select the icon in the selection window.

To exit the fixed camera view, select an-

other camera view in the selection window.

Turning the camera view on/off

manually

Automatic camera

perspective

1.

Press the button.

2.

The icon in the selection window is se-

lected automatically.

Principle

To exit the steering-dependent camera

view, select another camera view in the se-

lection window or press the button again.

The automatic camera perspective shows a

steering-dependent view in the respective driv-

ing direction.

This perspective adapts to the respective driv-

ing situation.

257

Parking

CONTROLS

The side view looks from rear to front and, in

case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-

sible obstacles.

Side protection

Principle

The side Park Distance Control is automati-

cally displayed when the automatic camera

perspective is turned on. The function shows

obstacles located next to the vehicle.

General information

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Turning the side view on/off

Display

The selection window lets you choose the side

view for the left or right side of the vehicle.

1.

Press the button.

2.

Select the icon for the desired vehicle

side in the selection window.

To exit the side view, select another cam-

era view in the selection window.

To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle

markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-

hicle.

3D view

▷

No markings: no obstacles detected.

Principle

Color marks: warning against detected ob-

stacles.

With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the

vehicle top view in the selection window.

Specified perspectives can be selected on the

circle.

System limits

The system only displays stationary obstacles

that were previously detected by sensors while

passing them.

General information

The current perspective is marked with a cam-

era icon.

The system does not detect whether an obsta-

cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-

still, the marks are not shown anymore in the

display after a certain time. The area next to

the vehicle must be newly captured.

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Turning the 3D view on/off

Side view

1.

Press the button.

"More"

2.

3.

Principle

"3D view"

Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-

ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at

the curb or with other obstacles on the side.

To exit the 3D view, select another camera

view on the left toolbar.

258

Parking

CONTROLS

Trailer hitch view

Car wash view

Principle

To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can

zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.

Principle

The car wash view assists when entering a car

wash.

General information

When zooming in, remember that the view

may no longer show certain obstacles.

General information

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Turning the car wash view on/off

Turning the trailer hitch view on/off

1.

Press the button.

"More"

2.

3.

1.

Press the button.

"More"

"Car wash view"

2.

3.

To exit the car wash view, select a different

camera view in the left toolbar.

"Trailer coupling view"

To exit the trailer hitch view, select another

camera view in the left toolbar.

Display

Your own lane is displayed for easier driving

into a car wash.

Two static circular segments help to estimate

the distance of the trailer to the trailer hitch.

This view can be used to position the vehicle

correctly within the washing system guide rails.

A docking line dependent on the steering-

wheel angle helps with aiming for the trailer

with the trailer hitch.

In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll

freely forward.

Additional information:

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 126.

259

Parking

CONTROLS

Press the panorama view button.

Panorama View

Principle

To exit panorama view, select another camera

view on the left toolbar or press the panorama

view button again.

The panoramic view gives you an earlier view

of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and

intersections.

Display

General information

Road users concealed by obstacles to the left

and right of the vehicle can only be detected

relatively late from the driver's seat. To pro-

vide greater visibility, the front camera and, de-

pending on vehicle equipment, rearview cam-

era cover the side of the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this func-

tion can turn on automatically when activation

points are saved.

Yellow lines on the screen display identify the

bumpers of your own vehicle.

The camera image shows different levels of

distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-

ble for distance estimations.

When reverse gear is engaged, the reversing

camera view is displayed. Depending on ve-

hicle equipment, the front camera view is dis-

played when forward gear is engaged.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the function

can be used when driving forward or in re-

verse.

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Automatic activation of

panorama view

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following cam-

eras:

Principle

Positions at which panorama view should

switch on automatically can be saved as acti-

vation points.

▷

Rearview camera.

Depending on the equipment: front camera.

Turning the panoramic view on/off

Panorama view can be turned on and off using

the Park Assist or panorama view button:

General information

Up to ten activation points can be stored.

The activation points can be used when driv-

ing forward and, depending on national-mar-

ket version, when reversing.

1.

Press the park assistance button.

"Panorama view"

Follow instructions in the Parking assistance

systems chapter.

2.

Or:

260

Parking

CONTROLS

Functional requirements

Editing activation points

You can rename or delete specific activation

points or all of them.

▷

A GPS signal must be received.

▷

Depending on national-market version: A

BMW ID or driver profile must be activated.

1. Turn on the panorama view using the Park

Assist key or panorama view button.

▷

The reversing camera and front camera

must be installed.

2. "Manage points"

The direction of travel, selector lever posi-

tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to

a stored activation point.

A list of all saved activation points is dis-

played.

3. Select the desired setting.

Storing activation points

1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you Door opening angle

want the system to turn on, then stop.

2. Turn on the panorama view using the Park

Principle

Depending on vehicle equipment, the door

opening angle display is shown automatically

when stationary.

Assist key or panorama view button.

3. "Activation point"

The current position is displayed.

4. "Save activation point"

This display helps estimate how far the doors

can be opened when parking.

Activation points are saved with the following

information, for example:

If obstacle marking is activated, the parking

view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the

opening angles of the doors.

▷

With the city/town.

With the city/town and the street.

With the GPS coordinates.

General information

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

You can rename the location and street infor-

mation created automatically.

Using activation points

The use of activation points can be switched

on and off.

Display

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Parking"

6. "GPS-based"

The maximum opening angle of the doors is

displayed in selector lever position P.

261

Parking

CONTROLS

Data protection, refer to page 71.

System limits

The system does not provide a warning of ap-

proaching road users.

▷

The My BMW App must be installed on the

mobile end device.

ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with

an existing ConnectedDrive account must

be activated.

The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the

display for technical reasons.

Even if the door opening angle indicator on the

control display does not overlap with any other

objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to

other objects.

BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 72.

Activating/deactivating Remote 3D

View

The function can be activated or deactivated

individually or together with other functions.

Because of the perspective, higher, protruding

objects may be closer than they appear on the

control display.

1.

Apps menu

Remote 3D View

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Data privacy"

Principle

The My BMW App and camera views in park-

ing view such as automatic camera perspec-

tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-

roundings on a mobile device.

5. Select the desired setting.

After activation, Remote 3D View can be

accessed using the My BMW App.

The function displays a snapshot of the situa-

tion.

System limits

The system may not be fully operational or

may not be available in the following situa-

tions:

General information

For reasons of data protection, the function

can only be used three times within two hours.

▷

With a door or the cargo area open. Dark

fields in the display indicate areas that are

not recorded by the system.

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

▷

With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.

When other camera functions are being

performed in the vehicle.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following cam-

eras:

▷

The vehicle moves faster than walking

speed.

▷

Front camera.

In case of missing or weak Internet connec-

tion.

Top view cameras.

Rearview camera.

Functional requirements

▷

Data transfer must be activated.

262

Parking

CONTROLS

Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid

driving off quickly while Park Distance Control

is not yet active.

Park Distance Control

Principle

Park Distance Control assists with parking.

Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles

in front of or behind the vehicle.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-

sonic sensors can also be reported.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

General information

▷

Ultrasonic sensors, side.

The range of the system, depending on obsta-

cles and environmental conditions, is approx.

6 ft/2 m.

Turning Park Distance Control

on/off

An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-

pending collision at a distance to the object of

approx. 27 in/70 cm.

Turning on the system automatically

The system switches on automatically in the

following situations:

For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic

warning is issued as early as a distance to the

object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

▷

When drive-ready state is switched on

when selector lever position R is engaged.

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

▷

While approaching detected obstacles

if the speed is lower than approx.

2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance

depends on the situation in question.

Safety information

The automatic activation of detected obstacles

can be activated or deactivated.

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Parking"

6. "Automatic PDC activation"

Turning off the system automatically

When driving forward, the system turns off au-

tomatically as needed when a certain distance

or speed is exceeded.

Warning

Due to high speeds when the Park Distance

Control is activated, the warning can be de-

layed due to physical circumstances. There is

a risk of injury and risk of property damage.

Turning the system on/off manually

Press the button.

263

Parking

CONTROLS

▷

On: the LED illuminates.

Off: the LED goes out.

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Parking"

6. "PDC signal volume"

7. Set the desired value.

If the system is manually switched on when

the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview

camera image is displayed.

Depending on national-market

version: Turn off acoustic warning

Depending on national-market version, the

acoustic warning can be turned off while per-

forming a parking maneuver.

Depending on the national-market version, the

system cannot be turned off manually when

the reverse gear is engaged.

Acoustic warning

Press

the icon in the status field at the top

General information

of the control display.

An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle

is approaching an object. E.g., when an object

is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a

sound is heard from the rear left speaker.

When the Park Distance Control is switched

on again, the acoustic warning is automatically

switched on again.

Visual warning

The shorter the distance to the object, the

shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.

General information

The approach to an object is displayed on the

control display and in the instrument cluster as

soon as the system is activated.

When the distance to a detected object is less

than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is

sounded.

When there are objects in front of and behind

the vehicle at the same time, at a distance

smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating

continuous tone will sound between the front

and rear speakers.

Objects that are farther away are already dis-

played before a signal sounds.

Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning

circle lines and obstacle markings are shown

for a better estimation of the space required.

The intermittent tones and the continuous tone

are turned off when selector lever position P is

engaged.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor

detection range is shown by the shaded, ring-

shaped area. Green, yellow, and red markings

indicate when obstacles are detected within

the detection range.

Depending on national-market version, the in-

termittent tones are switched off after a short

time when the vehicle is stationary.

If an object approaches when the vehicle is

stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.

If vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic Warn-

ing: A warning is also shown on the display for

vehicles approaching from the side at the rear

and front.

Adjusting the volume

To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle

markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-

hicle.

The volume of the acoustic warning can be

adjusted.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

264

Parking

CONTROLS

The system does not detect whether an obsta-

cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-

ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are

hidden after a certain time. The area on the

side of the vehicle must be newly captured.

Display

Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings

may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-

hind the vehicle.

Also follow the information on system limits in

the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Trailer towing

The rear functions of Park Distance Control are

switched off with a trailer attached or when the

trailer socket is occupied.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor

detection range is shown by the shaded area

on the control display.

Example display of warnings behind the vehi-

cle.

Obstacles next to the vehicle are not displayed.

Depending on the national-market version, the

rear functions of Park Distance Control remain

switched on when trailer towing is enabled.

An icon is displayed on the control dis-

play.

Additional information:

Towing a trailer, refer to page 318.

Example display of warnings next to the vehi-

cle.

Unwarranted warnings

Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-

ranted warnings.

▷

Gray shaded area: Sensor detection range.

No obstacles were detected within detec-

tion range.

To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance

in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-

tance Control activation on obstacle detection.

Colored marks in shaded area: Obstacles

have been detected within the detection

range.

Malfunction

Shaded area interrupted: the area next to

the vehicle has not yet been detected.

An icon is displayed on the control dis-

play.

Depending on vehicle equipment: The

sensor detection range may not be shown on

the control display.

System limits

General information

A Check Control message is displayed.

The function for protecting the vehicle sides

only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-

viously detected by the sensors when passing

by.

Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the

vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-

265

Parking

CONTROLS

ter or another qualified service center or repair

shop.

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Active Park Distance Control

Warning

When using the trailer hitch, the assistance

system cannot react correctly because the

sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-

cident, injury, and property damage. Do not

use the driver assistance system while tow-

ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,

e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.

Principle

The Park Distance Control brake function ini-

tiates emergency braking if there is an acute

risk of collision.

General information

Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-

vented under all circumstances.

Sensors

The function is available below walking speed

when driving in reverse or rolling backward.

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the

brake intervention. Emergency braking is not

performed.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.

Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Rearview camera.

After emergency braking to a stop, further

creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-

ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly

press the accelerator pedal and release as

needed.

Deactivating Active Park Distance

Control temporarily

After emergency braking, the function can be

temporarily deactivated on the control display.

A corresponding message is displayed.

If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,

the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-

ble at any time.

1. "Configure"

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

2. "Deactivate temporarily"

During continued driving in this surrounding

situation, no further emergency braking will

occur.

Safety information

The function is automatically reactivated when

Park Distance Control is switched on again.

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

Settings

It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle

will be protected by the system.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

266

Parking

CONTROLS

5. "Parking"

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

6. "Active PDC emergency braking"

7. Select the desired setting.

Safety information

Display

Warning

As soon as the system engages, an

icon is displayed with a corresponding

message.

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Functional limitations

The system cannot be used in the following

situations, for example:

Warning

When using the trailer hitch, the assistance

system cannot react correctly because the

sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-

cident, injury, and property damage. Do not

use the driver assistance system while tow-

ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,

e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.

▷

While Hill Descent Control is regulating the

vehicle speed, emergency braking is deacti-

vated.

Hill Descent Control, refer to page 219.

When driving with a trailer.

▷

If applicable, turn off the system temporarily, if

needed.

Sensors

Drive-off monitoring

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors:

Principle

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

In case of a risk of collision, the start-up mon-

itoring reduces the drive power when driving

off.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Functional requirements

General information

▷

Selector lever position D or R is engaged

when the vehicle is stationary.

When obstacles are detected in close range in

front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-

duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual

braking.

▷

Obstacles in the immediate vicinity are de-

tected in front of or behind the vehicle.

When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-

cle, the system will brake.

267

Parking

CONTROLS

▷

The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,

nearly to the end point.

System limits

The accelerator pedal is immediately ap-

plied after engaging the selector lever posi-

tion and obstacle detection.

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Turning drive-off monitoring on/off

Trailer towing

The system is deactivated if the trailer power

socket is occupied or trailer towing is activated,

e.g., when using a trailer or rear bicycle rack.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Parking"

Automatic Parking Assistant

6. "Drive off monitoring"

7. "Drive off monitoring"

Principle

Automatic Parking Assistant provides support

when parallel parking and parking transverse

to the road.

A Check Control message is displayed where

applicable.

Depending on the national-market version, the

system is automatically turned on again at the

next drive.

In addition, the system makes it easier to

park out of parallel and perpendicular parking

spaces.

Canceling reduced drive power

The reduction of the drive power is canceled in

the following situations:

The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of

the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-

ble parking spaces are calculated based on the

objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The

system status is displayed.

▷

The accelerator pedal is released.

After the accelerator pedal has been de-

pressed completely twice.

The system calculates the best possible park-

ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,

and takes control of the vehicle while parking.

▷

A specific distance has been traveled.

If the reduction in drive power is canceled by

covering a certain distance, the drive power is

released gradually.

The operating principle and operation of the

system is divided into the following steps:

▷

Parking space search.

Turning on.

Display

Parking.

As soon as the system engages, an

icon is displayed with a corresponding

message.

Driving out of parking spaces.

The parking manoeuver while parking is per-

formed automatically.

When driving out of parallel parking spaces,

the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it

reaches a position where it can be driven out

of the parking space without further steering

movements.

268

Parking

CONTROLS

When driving out of perpendicular parking

spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the

parking space to enable continued driving in

the desired direction.

Parking methods

Park Assist supports the following functions:

General information

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

Safety information

Warning

Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the

road.

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Perpendicular parking: reverse or forward

parking perpendicular to the road.

Warning

When using the trailer hitch, the assistance

system cannot react correctly because the

sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-

cident, injury, and property damage. Do not

use the driver assistance system while tow-

ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,

e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.

Warning

Driving out of parallel parking spaces.

The system can steer the vehicle over or onto

curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Watch surrounding traffic

closely and actively intervene where appro-

priate

269

Parking

CONTROLS

The depth of perpendicular parking spaces

must be estimated by the driver. Due to

technical limitations, the system is only able

to approximate the depth of perpendicular

parking spaces.

Parking operation

▷

Doors and cargo area are closed.

▷

Driver's seat belt is fastened.

Driving out of perpendicular parking spaces.

Leaving parking spaces

Sensors

▷

The vehicle was parked using the Auto-

matic Parking Assistant, and an object has

been detected in the area around the vehi-

cle.

The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled

by the following sensors:

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

▷

The vehicle was manually parked in re-

verse, and objects have been detected in

the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The

distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-

ches/15 cm.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Functional requirements

▷

The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m

longer than the vehicle.

Measurement of parking spaces

▷

Maximum speed while driving forward ap-

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.

Displays

▷

Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

General information

The current status of parking assistance sys-

tems is shown on the right-hand toolbar, on

the instrument cluster, and on the Head-up

display, depending on vehicle equipment.

Suitable parking space

Longitudinal parking:

▷

Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a

parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.

Different icons are shown on the control dis-

play for selecting the parking method.

Minimum length of gap between two ob-

jects: own vehicle length plus approx.

2.6 ft/0.8 m.

The sequence of the displayed icons corre-

sponds to the prioritized parking option.

▷

Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

The direction of the arrow changes for the

icons for parking methods for driving out of a

parking space.

Perpendicular parking:

▷

Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a

parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.

Icon

Meaning

Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle

width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.

Reverse lengthwise parking, right.

Reverse lengthwise parking, left.

Minimum depth: own vehicle length.

270

Parking

CONTROLS

The parking assistance systems view is

displayed.

Icon

Meaning

Reverse perpendicular parking.

Forward perpendicular parking.

The status of the parking space search and

possible parking spaces are displayed on

the control display and in the instrument

cluster.

Turning parking operation display

on/off

When the Automatic Parking Assistant is ac-

tive, the parking operation is displayed in the

camera image on the control display.

3. On the control display: Select one of the

parking maneuvers offered. You can switch

to another parking maneuver as necessary.

In the instrument cluster: select suggested

parking method with the knurled wheel on

the steering wheel.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

Green: the system takes control of the

parking operation.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Parking"

4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play or in the instrument cluster.

The speed can be reduced with the brake.

Other interventions will cancel the system.

6. "Show assistance info"

Depending on national-market version, an

intermittent or continuous tone sounds for

Park Distance Control.

Turning the signal tone on/off

The signal tone for suitable parking spaces

can be turned on and off.

At the end of the parking operation, selec-

tor lever position P is set.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

The end of the parking operation is indi-

cated on the control display and in the in-

strument cluster.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Parking"

5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if

needed.

6. "Sound when available"

Driving out of a parking space using

the Automatic Parking Assistant

1. Turn on drive-ready state.

Parking using the Automatic

Parking Assistant

1. For the parking space search when driving

past parked vehicles at a speed of up to

approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of

max. 5 ft/1.5 m.

2.

With the vehicle at a standstill, press

button or engage reverse gear.

The parking space search is activated

and displayed on the instrument cluster.

The parking assistance systems view is

displayed.

3. On the control display: select the desired

parking method.

2. Press the

gear.

button or engage reverse

271

Parking

CONTROLS

In the instrument cluster: select suggested

parking method with the knurled wheel on

the steering wheel.

▷

When unfastening the driver's seat belt.

With open cargo area.

With open hood.

4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play or in the instrument cluster.

With the doors open.

During activation or intervention by driver

assistance systems.

Green: the system takes control of ma-

neuvering.

▷

When changing over to another function on

the control display.

The speed can be reduced with the brake.

Other interventions will cancel the system.

When the view on the control display is

overlaid with messages.

A message will be displayed at the end of

the maneuver.

▷

On snow-covered or slippery road.

On steep uphill or downhill grades.

5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits

driving out of parking space and driving off

as usual.

When there are obstacles that are hard to

overcome such as curbs.

The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned

off automatically.

▷

When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-

pear.

Canceling Automatic Parking

Assistant manually

The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-

celed manually at any time, e.g.:

With insufficient distances, which are indi-

cated by Park Distance Control.

When a maximum number of parking at-

tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-

ceeded.

▷

Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice

in succession.

When the system is automatically aborted, se-

lector lever position P is engaged.

▷

Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and

move the steering wheel slightly at the

same time.

A Check Control message is displayed where

applicable.

▷

Depress the brake pedal and operate the

selector lever at the same time.

Continuing the parking operation

If parking or leaving a parking space has been

interrupted, the operation can be continued, if

needed.

The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled

without engaging selector lever position P.

Driving can continue immediately.

Turn the Automatic Parking Assistant on again

and follow the instructions on the control dis-

play or in the instrument cluster.

Canceling Automatic Parking

Assistant automatically

The system automatically cancels in situations

such as the following:

System limits

▷

When the driver grasps the steering wheel

or takes over steering.

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

When operating the accelerator pedal or

the selector lever.

When setting the parking brake.

272

Parking

CONTROLS

No parking assistance

The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-

fer assistance in the following situations:

Back-up assistant

Principle

▷

In tight curves.

The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,

e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-

ing or road situations.

For diagonal parking spaces.

When towing a trailer.

For parking spaces that are only marked

with lines on the ground. The system ori-

ents itself according to objects.

General information

The vehicle stores the driving movements of

the last distance covered. This stored distance

can be driven in reverse with automated steer-

ing.

▷

For special parking spaces, e.g., metered

parking spaces with automatic locking

mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-

tems.

The system takes over the steering. The driver

must control the speed using the accelerator

and brake pedals.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

A maximum of 164 ft/50 m are stored.

Follow the information in the "Parking assis-

tance systems" chapter.

▷

On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads.

Safety information

▷

On slippery ground.

On steep uphill or downhill grades.

With accumulations of leaves/snow in the

parking space.

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing

the traffic situation. Based on the limits of

the system, it cannot independently react to

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready

to take over steering and braking at any time,

and actively intervene where appropriate.

▷

In case of changes to an already-measured

parking space.

With ditches or edges, for instance an edge

of a port.

Parking spaces that are not suitable may

be detected or suitable parking spaces may

not be detected at all.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The Automatic Parking Assistant may not be

operational. Have the vehicle checked by an

authorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Warning

When using the trailer hitch, the assistance

system cannot react correctly because the

sensors are concealed. There is a risk of ac-

cident, injury, and property damage. Do not

use the driver assistance system while tow-

273

Parking

CONTROLS

ing a trailer or when using the trailer hitch,

e.g., for a rear bicycle rack.

In case of obstacles, stop immediately and

take over control of the vehicle. Follow the

instructions for Park Distance Control.

5. Right before the end of the stored distance

covered, a signal tone will sound and a

message is displayed.

Warning

The system can steer the vehicle over or onto

curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Watch surrounding traffic

closely and actively intervene where appro-

priate

Stop no later than when normal road traffic

is reached and take control of the vehicle

such as by shifting to forward gear.

Canceling the Back-up Assistant

manually

The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-

tant can be canceled manually:

Functional requirements

▷

Drive forward without interruption to store

the distance covered.

▷

"Cancel": select the icon on the control

display.

Press the button.

To store the distance covered, do not drive

faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.

▷

No trailer towing.

Driving in reverse with automated

steering

1. Turn on drive-ready state.

Canceling the Back-up Assistant

automatically

The system automatically cancels in situations

such as the following:

2.

3.

With the vehicle at a standstill, press

button or engage reverse gear.

▷

When the driver grasps the steering wheel

or takes over steering.

The parking assistance systems view is

displayed.

When shifting from reverse gear to another

selector lever position.

"Start back-up Assistant"

During activation or intervention by driver

assistance systems.

The length of the distance covered is dis-

played on the control display and in the in-

strument cluster.

When exiting the stored lane when revers-

ing, for instance with maximum steering-

wheel angle.

If applicable, follow the instructions on the

control display or in the instrument cluster.

▷

When the view on the control display is

overlaid with messages.

4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and

carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-

tor pedal and the brake.

▷

In case of a slippery surface.

When the vehicle is rolling such as on a

slope.

Green: the system takes control of

steering.

▷

In case of changed ambient conditions.

When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-

cle's surroundings.

274

Parking

CONTROLS

▷

When the trailer power socket is occupied

or when trailer towing is activated.

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h.

System limits

▷

The maximum speed when reversing is

limited to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.

A warning is issued at a speed of approx.

4 mph/7 km/h.

If the maximum speed is exceeded, the

function is interrupted.

Different influences can lead to side deviations

when driving the stored distance covered in re-

verse. For example, this includes the following

factors:

▷

Steering movements when the vehicle is

stationary while storing the distance cov-

ered.

▷

The speed is not adapted to the distance

covered.

Certain road characteristics such as gradi-

ents, inclines or slippery road surface.

Greatly deviating conditions when storing

and driving the route, for instance other

tires or changed ambient conditions like

weather.

Also follow the information on system limits in

the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

275

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Programs

Vehicle features and options

Program

Suspension settings

Comfort-oriented.

Balanced out.

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

"COMFORT"

"SPORT"

Additional information:

"SPORT PLUS"

Consistently sporty.

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Selecting a program

Adaptive M chassis

Using the button

Press the button and select the desired

program on the control display.

Principle

By adjusting the running gear, the system re-

duces movement of the vehicle body when

driving in a sporty way or on uneven roads.

Via iDrive

Adaptive M running gear settings can be con-

figured in M Setup.

This enhances the driving dynamics and driv-

ing comfort depending on the road condition

and driving style.

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 210.

Overview

Display in the instrument cluster

Button in the vehicle

When the display for M Setup is acti-

vated in the instrument cluster, the se-

lected program is displayed.

Additional information:

Central display area, refer to page 153

Adaptive M Suspension

Professional

SETUP

The Adaptive M Professional suspension is ac-

tively controlled and includes the following sys-

tems:

▷

Active Roll Stabilization, refer to page 277.

Integral Active Steering, refer to page 221.

276

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Active roll stabilization

Active roll stabilization provides increased driv-

ing comfort while improving vehicle agility and

stability. Among other things, the system en-

ables a more dynamic response to steering

movements and reduces the body's tendency

to roll when cornering quickly or making quick

evasive maneuvers. This means that, e.g., the

lateral head movements of the occupants are

reduced.

277

Climate control

CONTROLS

Climate control

Icon

Function

Vehicle features and options

Fresh air.

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Air flow.

Additional information:

Air distribution.

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Climate control

SYNC program.

Overview

Seat and armrest heating.

Active seat ventilation.

Steering wheel heating.

Functions in the Climate menu

Icon

Function

Turn the climate control sys-

tem on/off.

Automatic program.

Temperature.

Buttons, automatic climate control

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

Air recirculation mode.

Icon

Function

Defrost function.

Automatic recirculated-air con-

trol.

Rear window defroster.

278

Climate control

CONTROLS

Buttons, rear automatic climate control

Turning the air conditioning system

on/off

The climate control system can be turned on or

off via iDrive.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2.

Tap the power button.

Icon

Function

The entire climate control system is turned on

or off with the last settings applied.

Automatic program.

When the air conditioning system is turned

on, individual climate control functions can be

turned off.

Temperature.

Settings

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

Air flow.

You can configure individual settings for cli-

mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:

▷

Intensity of seat heating.

Pre-conditioning.

Air conditioning when getting in.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

Air distribution.

Seat and armrest heating.

2. "Individual settings" or "General settings"

3. Select the desired setting.

Turning rear automatic climate

control on/off

Calling up climate control functions

The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:

Functional requirements

▷

Automatic climate control is turned on.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu on

the menu bar.

▷

Defrost function is deactivated.

Via iDrive

Or:

1.

Apps menu

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Climate control"

2. "Individual settings"

279

Climate control

CONTROLS

3. "Second row of seats"

4. "Rear climate control"

5. Select the desired setting.

General information

Depending on the equipment, the automatic

program provides the best possible settings

for climate control functions depending on

the outside temperature, interior temperature,

sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-

perature setting:

The rear climate control can be activated with

the default settings for temperature and the

AUTO program:

"Activate with default settings"

▷

Air flow.

Air distribution.

Switching on using the button

Press one of the following buttons:

Temperature.

Seat and armrest heating.

Active seat ventilation.

Steering wheel heating.

▷

Temperature.

Maximum cooling.

Automatic program.

The automatic program takes seat occupancy

into account, regulating the climate in an en-

ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-

cupants.

Upper side of the air flow, manual button.

Air distribution, manual.

Switching off using the button

At the same time, a condensation sensor con-

trols the automatic program in order to prevent

window condensation to the extent possible.

Press and hold the bottom of the but-

ton.

Overview

Locking the rear automatic climate

control

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2. "Individual settings"

3. "Second row of seats"

4. "Lock rear climate control"

1

Settings

Automatic program

2

3

4

5

Air flow intensity

Climate control functions bar

Temperature

Principle

The automatic program ensures a comforta-

ble climate, which can be modified with the

desired temperature and individual settings.

Seat heating

Steering wheel heating

Active seat ventilation

The automatic program cools, ventilates or

heats the vehicle interior automatically.

280

Climate control

CONTROLS

Each level has a specific control range of the

intensity.

Turning the automatic program

on/off

The AUTO program can be switched on or off

via iDrive.

Based on the stored data models, the intensi-

ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is

not necessary to manually change the desired

intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.

The individually selected settings of the cli-

mate control functions are stored and auto-

matically set up again such as after the vehicle

is started again.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2.

Tap the AUTO program button.

Display

Switching the rear climate control

automatic program on/off

The indicator on the menu bar provides infor-

mation about the temperature difference be-

tween the configured desired temperature and

current interior temperature.

Via iDrive

▷

The red or blue bar next to the temperature

display indicates the progress of heating or

cooling.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

▷

The desired interior temperature is reached

as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.

2. "Individual settings"

3. "Second row of seats"

4. "Automatic climate"

5. Select the desired setting.

Active climate control functions, e.g., seat

heating, are indicated by the icons on the

menu bar.

Using the button

Temperature

Press the button.

The LED of the button is illuminated

when the automatic program is turned

Principle

on.

The automatic climate control cools or heats

to the configured temperature and then keeps

the temperature constant.

Setting the intensity

When the automatic program is activated,

the intensity of individual climate control func-

tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-

ally.

General information

Do not rapidly switch between different tem-

perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-

mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-

just the set temperature.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2. "Individual settings"

3. Select the desired setting.

281

Climate control

CONTROLS

Adjusting the upper body temperature

Setting the temperature

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2. "Individual settings"

3. "Driver" or "Front passenger"

4. "Temperature adjustment upper body"

5. Increase or decrease temperature.

You can set the desired temperature for driver

and front passenger individually on the menu

bar.

Air flow

Principle

The air flow generated by the blower can be

adjusted as needed.

▷

Raise the temperature.

Lower the temperature.

The air flow may be reduced to preserve the

vehicle battery.

Setting the rear automatic climate

control temperature

Adjusting the air flow

The air flow can be set via iDrive.

Via iDrive

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2. "Individual settings"

3. "Second row of seats"

4. Set the desired temperature.

2.

Select the desired setting.

Automatic program:

Using the button

▷

Tap the large air flow icon to increase the

air flow.

Press the upper or lower button side to

set the desired temperature.

▷

Tap the small air flow icon to reduce the air

flow.

Manual mode:

Upper body temperature

▷

Tap up arrow: Increase air flow.

Tap down arrow: Reduce air flow.

General information

The air temperature in the upper body area

can be adjusted.

This does not change the set interior tempera-

ture for the driver and front passenger.

282

Climate control

CONTROLS

▷

Aim the air flow into the footwell, ar-

row 1.

Adjusting the air volume of the rear

climate control

Aim the air flow toward the upper body

area, arrow 2.

Via iDrive

Aim the air flow at the windshield , ar-

row 3.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

The selected air distribution is displayed.

2. "Individual settings"

3. "Second row of seats"

4. "Fan"

5. Select the desired setting.

Using the button

Pressing the upper or lower side of

the button repeatedly: decrease or in-

crease air flow.

Adjusting the air distribution of the

rear climate control

The selected air flow is shown on the rear cli-

mate control display.

Pressing the upper or lower side of the

button. Select the desired setting.

Air distribution settings

The selected air distribution is shown

on the rear climate control display.

Principle

In manual mode, the air distribution can be

adjusted as needed.

Air conditioning

Adjusting the air distribution

The air distribution can be set via iDrive:

Principle

With the climate control function, the air inside

the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then

warmed again depending on the temperature

settings.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

Functional requirement

Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.

2.

Tap the air distribution icon on the

climate control functions bar.

3. Select the desired setting:

283

Climate control

CONTROLS

Switching the cooling function on/off Turning maximum cooling on/off

The air conditioning can be switched on or off

via iDrive:

Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via

iDrive:

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2.

Tap the air conditioning button.

2.

Tap the maximum cooling button.

In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-

tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid

window condensation.

Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body

area. Open the vents.

Rear automatic climate control:

Press the button.

Depending on the weather, the windshield and

the side windows may fog up briefly when

drive-ready state is switched on.

The button LED illuminates when max-

imum cooling is turned on.

When using the cooling mode, condensation

that will exit below the vehicle.

Air recirculation mode

Maximum cooling

Principle

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-

tants in the immediate environment by tempo-

rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The

system then recirculates the interior air.

Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle in-

terior quickly and effectively.

The lowest temperature and the maximum air

flow are set automatically.

In automatic recirculated-air control mode, out-

side air is fed in or the interior air recirculated

depending on the outside air quality.

The function is automatically activated in the

rear when the SYNC program is turned on.

When the air recirculation is turned off, outside

air is directed into the interior.

Functional requirement

The following functional requirements must be

met for maximum cooling:

General information

If there is window condensation, turn off the air

recirculation.

▷

The outside temperature is higher than ap-

prox. 32℉ / 0℃.

The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh

air or the circulated interior air in recirculation

mode.

▷

Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.

284

Climate control

CONTROLS

Turning air recirculation on/off

Air recirculation mode can be switched on or

off via iDrive:

General information

The following settings can be applied:

▷

Temperature.

Air flow.

Air distribution.

Automatic program.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2. The current operating mode is displayed on

the climate control functions bar. Tap the

button until the desired operating mode is

set.

Turning the SYNC program on/off

The SYNC program can be switched on or off

via iDrive:

▷

Recirculating air.

Fresh air.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2.

Tap the SYNC program button.

Automatic air recirculation.

If the settings on the front passenger side or in

the rear are changed, the program is automati-

cally switched off.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recir-

culation turns off automatically after some time

based on the ambient conditions in order to

prevent condensation.

Defrost function

SYNC program

Principle

With the defrost function, ice and condensation

are quickly removed from the windshield and

the front side windows.

Principle

If the SYNC program is activated, the settings

for the driver's side are transferred to the pas-

senger's side and to the rear.

The air flow and air temperature are automati-

cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-

densation.

For improved comfort, when the SYNC pro-

gram is deactivated, the following settings are

adjusted automatically in the automatic pro-

gram depending on seat occupancy:

The air distribution is directed toward the

windshield and front side windows.

If there is window condensation, turn on the

automatic program to take advantage of the

condensation sensor.

▷

If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,

the settings for the driver's side are applied

to the front passenger side.

When the defrost function is turned on, the rear

automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-

vide maximum performance.

▷

If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the

default settings for the rear are applied.

When the seat is occupied again, the most re-

cent settings are reapplied.

285

Climate control

CONTROLS

Turning the defrost function on/off

General information

Seat heating can also be used without arm-

rest heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as

needed.

Press the defrost button on the instru-

ment panel.

The LED of the button is illuminated

when the system is switched on.

If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-

nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions

are turned on automatically with the tempera-

ture that was last set.

Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-

shield and front side windows.

Adjusting seat heating

Rear window defroster

Automatic program

Principle

With the rear window defroster, ice and con-

densation are quickly removed from the rear

window.

When the automatic program is activated, the

intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As

you drive, the heater output is automatically

adjusted according to your set intensity.

Adjusting seat heating manually

The heater output level can be adjusted man-

ually:

Functional requirement

Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.

Turning the rear window defroster

on/off

Press the rear window heating button

on the instrument panel.

The LED in the button illuminates

when the rear window heating is turned on.

The rear window defroster switches off auto-

matically after a certain period of time.

1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the

menu bar, arrow 1.

If pre-conditioning is turned on, the rear win-

dow defroster is activated as needed.

2.

Press the seat heating button re-

peatedly until the desired level is selected,

arrow 2.

Seat and armrest heating

Principle

The system heats seats and armrests as

needed.

Turning the armrest heating on/off

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2. "Individual settings"

286

Climate control

CONTROLS

3. Select desired seat.

1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the

menu bar, arrow 1.

4. "Heat armrests and seat"

Turning the rear automatic climate

control seat heating on/off

2.

Press the seat ventilation button re-

peatedly until the desired level is selected,

arrow 2.

Press the button once for each temper-

ature level.

The maximum temperature is reached

when three LEDs are illuminated.

Steering wheel heating

Principle

The system heats the steering wheel as nec-

essary.

Active seat ventilation

Principle

Adjusting steering wheel heating

The system cools the seat and backrest as

necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat tempera-

ture.

Automatic program

When the automatic program is activated, the

intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-

justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-

matically adjusted according to your set inten-

sity.

Adjusting active seat ventilation

Automatic program

When the AUTO program is on, the intensity

of seat ventilation can be adjusted. As you

drive, the ventilation is automatically adjusted

according to the set intensity.

Adjusting steering wheel heating

manually

The heater output level can be adjusted man-

ually:

Adjusting the active seat ventilation

manually

The ventilation level can be adjusted manually:

1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the

menu bar, arrow 1.

2.

Press the steering wheel heating

button repeatedly until the desired level is

selected, arrow 2.

287

Climate control

CONTROLS

Ventilation in the rear

Ventilation

Principle

The ventilation system offers individual adjust-

ment ranges for direct/indirect ventilation in or-

der to optimize the flow of air within the vehi-

cle.

General information

Open the air vents and position them to ensure

effective air conditioning.

▷

Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-

rows 1.

The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-

ing on the set desired temperature.

Knurled wheel for variable opening and

closing of the air vents, arrows 2.

Front ventilation

Ventilation in the rear, on the side

Setting the air flow direction and air volume at

the vent.

▷

Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-

row 1.

▷

Changing the air flow direction: press the

button in the desired air flow direction.

Knurled wheel for variable opening and

closing of the air vents, arrow 2.

▷

Changing the air volume:

▷

Turn the knob clockwise: increase the

air volume.

Setting the ventilation

Depending on the desired ventilation, align the

air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-

sengers.

▷

Turn the knob counterclockwise to de-

crease the air volume.

Air quality

General information

The air quality in the interior is improved by the

following components:

288

Climate control

CONTROLS

▷

Emission tested passenger compartment.

Interior filter.

Preconditioning the vehicle while it charges,

makes it easier for the climate control system

to regulate the temperature while driving. This

increases the range.

Air conditioning system to control the

temperature, air flow and recirculated-air

mode.

Functional requirements

▷

Pre-conditioning.

▷

The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.

▷

The high-voltage battery is sufficiently

charged or the charging process is ongoing.

Interior filter

The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh

air or the circulated interior air in recirculation

mode.

If the high-voltage battery is deeply dis-

charged, it may take some time for the pre-

conditioning to be ready after the charging

process is started.

Depending on the equipment:

▷

Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-

flowing air.

▷

Time and date are set correctly.

The ventilation air vents are open.

▷

Nano-particle emissions are reduced.

Gaseous pollutants are filtered.

Turning on/turning off the pre-

conditioning

Microbial particles, viruses and allergens

are filtered.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends

having the interior filter changed during vehicle

maintenance.

Turning on/turning off via iDrive

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

Pre-conditioning

2. "Pre-conditioning"

3. Select the desired setting.

Principle

Turning on via vehicle key

The system can be switched on using the vehi-

cle key.

Pre-conditioning cools or heats the vehicle in-

terior to a comfortable temperature, depend-

ing on the inside/outside temperature, prior to

starting a drive. This function makes it easier

to remove snow and ice.

Press the button on the vehicle key

three times within 1 second.

After using the vehicle key, it takes ap-

prox. 3 seconds until pre-conditioning turns on.

General information

The pre-conditioning can be switched on and

off directly or via a preset departure time.

Automatic switch-off

The air automatically exits through the air

vents to the windshield, the side windows, the

upper body area and into the footwell.

To ensure that the vehicle is capable of start-

ing, the preconditioning may turn off auto-

matically, e.g., after repeated activation or be-

cause the high-voltage battery has insufficient

charge. If the preconditioning turns off because

the vehicle has insufficient charge, charge the

The system switches off automatically after

approx. 30 minutes or when the drive-ready

state is activated.

289

Climate control

CONTROLS

high-voltage battery. The pre-conditioning is

then available again.

Activating the departure time

To turn on the pre-conditioning prior to a de-

parture time, the respective departure time

must be activated beforehand.

Air conditioning for departure time

General information

Departure times can be set with time and day

of the week.

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2. "Pre-conditioning"

The switch-on point is determined automati-

cally based on the temperature.

3. "Pre-conditioning for departure"

On the desired weekdays, the system will be

turned on promptly before the set departure

time.

Display on the instrument cluster

Icon

Description

The departure time is preselected in two steps:

▷

Set departure times.

Icon illuminates: a depar-

ture time is activated.

Activate departure times.

Icon flashes: pre-condition-

ing is switched on.

A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-

tween setting and activating the departure

time and the planned departure time to allow a

sufficient period of time for the air conditioning.

Activating with My BMW App

Pre-conditioning will be turned off automati-

cally a few minutes after the set departure

time.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW

App with remote functionality can be used to

turn on pre-conditioning at a preset departure

time or immediately.

Setting the departure time

1.

Tap the icon for the Climate menu

on the menu bar.

2. "Pre-conditioning"

3. "Departure plan"

4. Set the desired departure time.

5. Select day of the week, if needed.

290

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

risk of property damage. Make sure that the

travel path of the respective system is clear

during programming and operation. Also fol-

low the safety information for the hand-held

transmitter.

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional information:

Compatibility

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

If this icon is printed on the packaging

or in the operating instructions of the

remote-controlled system, the system

is generally compatible with the integrated uni-

versal remote control.

Integrated universal remote

control

Additional questions are answered by:

Principle

▷

An authorized service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

The integrated universal remote control in the

interior mirror can operate remote-controlled

systems such as garage door openers, alarm

systems or locking systems.

▷

on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex

Corporation.

For any additional questions, contact an au-

thorized service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

General information

The integrated universal remote control re-

places up to three different hand-held trans-

mitters. To operate the remote control, the

buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-

grammed with the desired functions.

Operating elements on the interior

mirror

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored

functions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the

remote-controlled system near metal objects

to ensure the best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

▷

Buttons, arrow 1.

LED, arrow 2.

The operation of remote-controlled systems

with the integrated universal remote control

such as the garage door may result in injury,

for example, body parts becoming jammed in

a garage door. There is a risk of injury and

Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-

trolled system, arrow 3.

291

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Press and hold the button on the interior

mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform

this procedure three times.

Programming the integrated

universal remote control

If the integrated universal remote con-

trol remains nonoperational, continue

with the special features for rolling code

radio systems.

Functional requirement

The battery of the hand-held transmitter must

be fully charged at the time of programming

to ensure an optimal range of the integrated

universal remote control.

▷

LED does not illuminate green after

60 seconds: programming not com-

pleted.

Programming individual buttons

1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-

controlled system.

Repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code

wireless system

For systems with a rolling code radio system,

the integrated universal remote control and the

system also have to be synchronized.

2. Turn on standby state.

3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:

▷

Program available button:

Press the button.

▷

Program already assigned button:

Refer to information on synchronization in the

operating instructions of the remote-controlled

system.

Press and hold the button for approx.

20 seconds.

The LED on the interior mirror will slowly

begin flashing orange.

1. Program the desired button on the interior

mirror.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the

remote-controlled system approx. 1 to

12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons

on the interior mirror.

2. Locate and press the synchronizing button

on the remote-controlled system such as

on the garage door.

You have approx. 30 seconds for the next

step.

The required distance depends on the

hand-held transmitter.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a

second person.

5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held

transmitter.

3. Press and hold the programmed button on

the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held

transmitter was interrupted, hold down the

interior mirror button and repeatedly press

and release the hand-held transmitter but-

ton for 2 seconds.

If necessary, repeat this step up to three

times in order to end synchronization. Once

synchronization is complete, the program-

med function will be carried out.

6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:

Operation

After programming, the remote-controlled sys-

tem can be operated with the button on the

interior mirror.

▷

The LED illuminates green: program-

ming completed.

Release button.

▷

The LED flashes green rapidly: the

hand-held transmitter was detected but

programming is not complete.

292

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Press and hold the desired button of the re-

mote-controlled system within range until the

function is triggered.

Sockets

Principle

The socket can be used for electronic devi-

ces when the standby or drive-ready state is

switched on.

The LED on the interior mirror is continuously

illuminated green during the transmission of

the radio signal.

Deleting a button assignment

The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-

vidually.

General information

The total load of all sockets must not exceed

140 watts at 12 volts.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on

the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-

mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green

rapidly.

Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable

connectors.

Safety information

All stored button assignments will be deleted.

Warning

Sun visor

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of

the airbags such as portable navigation devi-

ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or

be thrown around in the car's interior while

unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk

of property damage. Make sure that devices

and cables are not in the airbag's area of

unfolding.

Glare shield

Fold the sun visor down or up.

Glare shield from the side

Folding the sun visor out

1. Fold the sun visor down.

2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-

ward the side window.

Warning

Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-

tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the

vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V

electrical system. There is a risk of injury

and risk of property damage. Only connect

battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the

jump-start terminals in the engine compart-

ment.

3. Shift it back to the desired position.

Folding the sun visor in

Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun

visor.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-

hind a cover.

Warning

If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-

tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,

these objects can cause a short circuit and

destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury

293

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

and risk of property damage. Make sure to

prevent metal objects from falling or being

plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the

cigarette lighter or socket cover again after

using the socket.

In the cargo area

Front center console

A socket is located on the right side in the

cargo area. Unfold the cover.

USB port

Press on the cover.

General information

Follow the information regarding the connec-

tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the

section on USB connections.

Additional information:

USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication;

Safety information

A socket is located between the cup holders.

Detach the cover.

Warning

If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-

tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,

these objects can cause a short circuit and

destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury

and risk of property damage. Make sure to

prevent metal objects from falling or being

plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the

cigarette lighter or socket cover again after

using the socket.

Rear center console

A socket is located in the center console.

Detach the cover.

294

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

In the center armrest

A USB port is located in the center console at

one of the marked positions.

A USB port is located in the center armrest.

Properties:

▷

USB port Type A.

▷

USB port Type C.

For charging mobile devices and for data

transfer.

For charging mobile devices.

Charge current: max. 3 A.

▷

Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

In the center console

Second row of seats

NOTICE

Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,

large USB connectors, may block or damage

the cover when it is being opened or closed.

There is a risk of property damage. Make

sure that the area of movement of the cover

is clear while opening and closing it.

Two USB ports are located in the center con-

sole in the rear at one of the marked positions.

Properties:

▷

USB port Type C.

For charging mobile devices.

Charge current: max. 3 A.

Press on the cover.

Travel & Comfort system

General information

The front seat backrests have mounts and var-

ious connection options:

295

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

▷

Mounts for attaching optional accessories,

e.g., universal holders for tablets or coat

hangers.

Wireless charging tray

Principle

USB ports.

The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly

charge Qi-certified smartphones.

Properties of the USB ports:

▷

USB port Type C.

For charging mobile devices.

General information

Charge current: maximum 3 A / 45 W per

seat.

When inserting the smartphone to be charged,

make sure that there is nothing between the

smartphone to be charged and the wireless

charging tray.

For more information, contact an authorized

service center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

The charging process is shown by the

charge indicator on the control display.

Overview

Safety information

Warning

When charging a Qi-compatible device in the

wireless charging tray, any metal objects on

the tray together with the device can become

very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,

e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or

cards for transmitting signals, may not func-

tion correctly when placed together on the

tray with the device. There is a risk of injury

and risk of property damage. When charging

mobile devices, make sure there are no ob-

jects on the tray together with the device.

The mounts for attaching optional accessories

are located behind the marked covers, as are

the USB ports.

Attaching optional accessories

1. Slide the cover all the way up.

Overview

Tray across in the center console:

2. Mount the optional accessories, refer to As-

sembly Instructions.

296

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

LED displays

Color Meaning

Blue

Smartphone is charging.

The blue LED continues to illumi-

nate when the Qi-capable smart-

phone is fully charged.

Or-

ange

Smartphone is not charging.

1

LED

Temperature on the smartphone

may be too high, or foreign object

may be in charging tray.

2

Storage area

Functional requirements

Red

Smartphone is not charging.

▷

The smartphone to be charged must be Qi-

certified.

Contact an authorized service center

or another qualified service center or

repair shop.

▷

Standby state is switched on.

Smartphone must not exceed maximum di-

mensions of approx. 6.0 x 3.1 x 0.7 in/154.5

x 80 x 18 mm.

Forgotten warning

General information

A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified

smartphone was forgotten in the wireless

charging tray when leaving the vehicle.

▷

Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-

able for wireless charging.

The smartphone to be charged is located

in the center of the tray. The smartphone

display is facing up.

The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-

strument cluster.

Inserting a smartphone

1. Open the tray cover.

Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning

1.

Apps menu

2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the

tray, with the display facing up.

2. "Vehicle"

3. Close the tray cover.

3. "System settings"

4. "Wireless charging tray"

5. "Mobile phone reminder"

System limits

The charge current may be reduced or charg-

ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-

less charging tray in the following situations:

▷

Due to excessive temperatures on the tray

and smartphone.

▷

If there are objects between the smart-

phone and wireless charging tray.

297

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

▷

If storage media or electronic cards,

e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic

stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are

located between the smartphone and wire-

less charging tray.

▷

Due to protective sleeves and covers that

exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm

Due to protective sleeves and covers made

of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic

parts.

▷

Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,

e.g., holders.

By configuring the smartphone settings,

e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions

given on the control display and smart-

phone, as applicable.

298

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

Warning

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can

damage the dashboard. Attached objects

could come loose. There is a risk of injury and

risk of property damage. Do not use anti-slip

pads.

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Opening the glove compartment

Warning

When driving, loose items or devices con-

nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile

phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,

e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-

ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There

is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.

Secure loose objects or devices that are con-

nected to the vehicle via a cable.

Pull the handle.

Warning

Closing the glove compartment

Open flaps of the storage compartments,

e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,

protrude into the interior when folded open

and may be in the way of an airbag that

deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-

age compartment can be thrown into the ve-

hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in

the event of an accident or when braking or

making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk

of injury. Always close storage compartments

immediately after use.

Fold the lid closed.

Locking the glove compartment

The glove compartment can be locked with

an integrated key. This prevents access to the

glove compartment.

After the glove compartment has been locked,

the vehicle key can be given to someone with-

out the integrated key, for example, when the

car is being parked by a parking attendant.

Additional information:

Integrated key, refer to page 77.

299

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

Fold-out compartment

Storage tray in center

console

Opening the fold-out compartment

Opening the storage compartment

Press the button and open the cover.

Press on the cover.

Storage compartments in

the doors

Closing the storage compartment

Pull the cover on the handle back.

General information

There are storage compartments in the doors.

Front center armrest

Safety information

General information

A storage compartment is located in the center

armrest between the seats.

Warning

Breakable objects such as glass bottles or

glasses can break in the event of an acci-

dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-

ken glass can be scattered in the car's in-

terior. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Do not use any breakable

objects while driving. Only stow breakable

objects in closed storage compartments.

Opening the center armrest

Press the button.

Closing the center armrest

Press both lids down until they engage.

300

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

Front cup holder

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may

damage the cup holders or be thrown about

the car’s interior in the event of an accident,

an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.

Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-

ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and

damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can

damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.

There is a risk of injury and risk of property

damage. Do not force objects into the cup

holder. Make sure that drink containers are

secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-

weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-

ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do

not transport hot beverages.

Two cup holders are located in the center con-

sole.

Closing the cup holder

Pull the cover on the handle back.

Maintaining the drink temperature

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment, drinks can

be kept cool or warm.

Safety information

Opening the cup holder

Warning

Contact with the hot metal insert of the ther-

moelectric cooling and heating system for a

cup holder can cause burn injuries. There is

a risk of injury. Do not touch the metal insert

when the thermoelectric cooling and heating

system for a cup holder is switched on.

Press on the cover.

NOTICE

When the thermoelectric cooling and heating

system for a cup holder is switched on and

the cover is closed, the thermoelectric cool-

ing and heating system for a cup holder can

overheat. There is a risk of property damage.

Switch the thermoelectric cooling and heating

system for a cup holder off before closing the

cover.

301

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

NOTICE

ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do

not transport hot beverages.

Temperature sensitive items may be dam-

aged by the hot metal insert of the thermo-

electric cooling and heating system for a cup

holder. There is a risk of property damage.

Use suitable containers only.

Overview

Switching on the thermal cup holder

Press the button for keeping cool or

warm once each.

▷

Blue LED illuminates: keep drinks cool.

Red LED illuminates: keep drinks warm.

Two cup holders are located in the center arm-

rest.

Switching off the thermoelectric

cooling and heating system for a cup

holder

Coat hooks

Press the button repeatedly until the

LEDs turn off.

General information

The coat hooks are located in the grab handles

in the rear.

Rear cup holder

Safety information

Warning

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-

struct the view while driving. There is a risk of

accident, injury, and property damage. When

suspending clothing articles from the coat

hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the

driver's view.

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may

damage the cup holders or be thrown about

the car’s interior in the event of an accident,

an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.

Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-

ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and

damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can

damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.

There is a risk of injury and risk of property

damage. Do not force objects into the cup

holder. Make sure that drink containers are

secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-

weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-

Warning

Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a

risk of objects flying about during braking and

evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury

and risk of property damage. Only hang light-

weight objects, for instance clothing articles,

from the coat hooks.

302

Cargo area

CONTROLS

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can slip and be

thrown into the car's interior, for instance in

the event of an accident, braking or an eva-

sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit

and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk

of property damage. Stow and secure objects

and cargo properly.

This chapter describes model-specific equip-

ment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the fu-

ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Loading

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.

There is a risk of property damage. Make

sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Safety information

Warning

High gross vehicle weight can overheat the

tires, damage them internally and cause

a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-

acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-

ducing directional stability, lengthening the

braking distances and changing the steering

response. There is a risk of accident, injury,

and property damage. Pay attention to the

permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires

and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle

weight.

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the

vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

the vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount

equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five

150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x

150) = 650 lbs).

Warning

When driving, loose items or devices con-

nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile

phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,

e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-

ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There

is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.

Secure loose objects or devices that are con-

nected to the vehicle via a cable.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely exceed the

303

Cargo area

CONTROLS

available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

of the rear seat backrests. When the rear

seat is not occupied, secure each of the

outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.

6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to the

vehicle. Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of the vehicle.

Lashing eyes in the cargo

area

Payload

General information

Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo

such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw

straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.

Overview

The maximum payload is the sum of the

weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the

less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo

The lashing eyes are located in the cargo area.

▷

Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

Storage compartment on

the left side

Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of

the backrests.

If necessary, fold down the rear backrests

to stow large cargo.

General information

A storage compartment is located on the left

side in the cargo area.

Fasten the aids for securing the load to the

lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Small and light cargo: secure with tension-

ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-

gage compartment net.

▷

Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo

straps.

Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-

ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the

rear seat backrests.

▷

Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as

possible, directly behind and at the bottom

304

Cargo area

CONTROLS

Opening the storage compartment

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-

cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s

interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-

dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There

is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat

backrest is locked after folding it back.

Warning

Pull the lug.

The stability of the child restraint system is

limited or compromised with incorrect seat

setting or improper installation of the child

seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.

Make sure that the child restraint system fits

securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-

just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests

and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that

seats and backrests are securely engaged or

locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the

height of the head restraints or remove them.

Enlarging the cargo area

Principle

The cargo area can be enlarged by folding

down the rear seat backrests.

General information

The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of

40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests and

the center section can be folded down sepa-

rately.

Folding down the rear seat backrest

The rear seat backrests can be folded down

from the rear.

From the rear

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts

jammed when folding down the rear seat

backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of

property damage. Make sure that the area of

movement of the rear seat backrest including

head restraint is clear when folding down.

Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest

forward.

305

Cargo area

CONTROLS

Folding back the rear seat backrest

Warning

From the rear

Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-

tion and engage it.

Body parts can become trapped when the

folding cargo cover is operated. There is a

risk of injury. When operating the folding

cargo cover, make sure that the travel path

of the cover is clear.

The red marking behind the lever disappears

completely.

Folding down middle section

Warning

An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be

thrown about the car's interior such as in the

event of an accident or a braking or evasive

maneuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of

property damage. Make sure the cargo cover

is securely engaged in the brackets.

Removing cargo covers

The cover can be removed to load bulky lug-

gage.

Fold down the center armrest and pull on the

loop.

Cover in the cargo area

1. Push the rear edge of the cargo cover up

and out of the side brackets, arrow 1.

Cargo cover

Safety information

Warning

When driving, loose items or devices con-

nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile

phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,

e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-

ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There

is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.

Secure loose objects or devices that are con-

nected to the vehicle via a cable.

2. Pull out cargo cover, arrows 2.

Cover in the tailgate

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Release cover on both sides.

306

Cargo area

CONTROLS

To do so, pull back the cover on the under-

side.

3. Lift the cover slightly.

4. Remove the cover along the guide towards

the rear.

Inserting the cargo covers

Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. Make

sure that the cargo covers are positioned cor-

rectly in the brackets and that they are en-

gaged.

Cover in the cargo area:

1. Place cover on the left and right.

2. Lift the rear cover slightly and push it for-

wards.

3. Push down the cover on the rear edge until

it snaps into place on both side brackets.

Cover in the tailgate:

1. Insert the cover along the guide into the top

brackets.

2. Push the cover on the underside forward

until it snaps into place on both side brack-

ets.

307

CONTROLS for Your BMW XM SUV First Generation (2023-2025)

Related Topics

Popular Owner Manuals

Latest Owner Manuals